Toyota OM47704U
User Manual: Toyota 2012 Toyota Prius Owners Manual Pdf | Owner's Manual Pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 636 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
1Before driving
Information on the hybrid system and adjusting and op-
erating features such as door locks, mirrors, and steer-
ing column
2When driving Driving, stopping and safe-driving information
3Interior
features
Air conditioning and audio systems, as well as other in-
terior features for a comfortable driving experience
4Maintenance
and care
Cleaning and protecting your vehicle, performing do-it-
yourself maintenance, and maintenance information
5When trouble
arises
What to do if the vehicle needs to be towed, gets a flat
tire, or is involved in an accident
6Vehicle
specifications Detailed vehicle information
7For owners Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners, and seat belt
and SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners
Index Alphabetical listing of information contained in this
manual
TABLE OF CONTENTS Index
2
1-1. Hybrid system
Hybrid system features ........ 30
Hybrid system
precautions ........................ 36
Energy monitor/consumption
screen ................................ 42
Hybrid vehicle driving
tips ..................................... 56
1-2. Key information
Keys ..................................... 58
1-3. Opening, closing and
locking the doors
Smart key system
(with entry function)............ 61
Smart key system
(without entry function)....... 79
Wireless remote control ....... 85
Side doors............................ 87
Back door............................. 93
1-4. Adjustable components
(seats, mirrors, steering
wheel)
Front seats ........................... 99
Rear seats.......................... 102
Head restraints................... 105
Seat belts ........................... 109
Steering wheel ................... 117
Inside rear view mirror........ 118
Outside rear view
mirrors.............................. 121
1-5. Opening and closing the
windows and moon roof
Power windows................... 123
Moon roof with Solar
Panel ................................ 126
1-6. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank
cap.................................... 131
1-7. Theft deterrent system
Immobilizer system............. 135
Theft prevention labels
(for the U.S.A.) ................. 137
1-8. Safety information
Correct driving posture ....... 138
SRS airbags ....................... 140
Front passenger occupant
classification system......... 154
Child restraint systems ....... 160
Installing child restraints ..... 165
1Before driving
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
3
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle............... 180
Power (ignition) switch........ 192
EV drive mode .................... 199
Hybrid transmission ............ 202
Turn signal lever ................. 211
Parking brake...................... 212
Horn .................................... 213
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters ............ 214
Indicators and warning
lights ................................. 219
Multi-information display ..... 223
Head-up display.................. 243
2-3. Operating the lights and
windshield wipers
Headlight switch.................. 250
Fog light switch ................... 256
Windshield wipers and
washer .............................. 258
Rear window wiper and
washer .............................. 262
Headlight cleaner switch..... 265
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control ..................... 266
Dynamic radar cruise
control .............................. 270
LKA (Lane-Keeping
Assist) .............................. 286
Driving assist systems........ 296
Hill-start assist control ........ 301
PCS (Pre-Collision
System)............................ 303
2-5. Driving information
Cargo and luggage............. 311
Vehicle load limits............... 316
Winter driving tips............... 317
Trailer towing...................... 322
Dinghy towing..................... 323
2When driving
TABLE OF CONTENTS Index
4
3-1. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
Air conditioning system ...... 326
Using the steering wheel
climate remote control
switches ........................... 337
Solar Ventilation System.... 339
Remote Air Conditioning
System ............................. 342
Rear window and outside
rear view mirror defogger
switch ............................... 346
3-2. Using the audio system
Audio system types ............ 347
Using the AUX port/
USB port .......................... 352
3-3. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list ................. 353
• Front interior lights ........... 354
• Personal lights ................. 355
• Rear interior light.............. 355
3-4. Using the storage features
List of storage features....... 357
• Glove boxes ..................... 358
• Console box ..................... 359
• Cup holders ...................... 360
• Bottle holders ................... 362
• Auxiliary boxes ................. 363
3-5. Other interior features
Sun visors........................... 364
Vanity mirrors ..................... 365
Outside temperature
display .............................. 366
Power outlets...................... 367
Seat heaters ....................... 369
Armrest............................... 371
Floor mats........................... 372
Luggage compartment
features ............................ 374
Garage door opener ........... 380
Safety Connect................... 388
3Interior features
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
5
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior............ 396
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior............. 399
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance
requirements..................... 402
General maintenance.......... 405
Emission inspection and
maintenance (I/M)
programs........................... 409
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions ....................... 410
Hood ................................... 413
Positioning a floor jack........ 416
Engine compartment........... 419
12-volt battery ..................... 431
Tires.................................... 437
Tire inflation pressure ......... 447
Wheels................................ 451
Electronic key battery.......... 454
Checking and replacing
fuses ................................. 456
Light bulbs........................... 467
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers............ 484
If your vehicle needs to
be towed........................... 485
If you think something
is wrong............................ 492
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning light turns
on or a warning buzzer
sounds.............................. 493
If a warning message
is displayed ...................... 507
If you have a flat tire........... 523
If the hybrid system will
not start ............................ 538
If you lose your keys........... 540
If the electronic key does
not operate properly......... 541
If the 12-volt battery is
discharged........................ 543
If your vehicle overheats .... 549
If the vehicle becomes
stuck................................. 554
If your vehicle has to
be stopped in an
emergency ....................... 556
4Maintenance and care 5When trouble arises
TABLE OF CONTENTS Index
6
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.) ........... 560
Fuel information ................. 571
Tire information .................. 575
6-2. Customization
Customizable features ....... 590
6-3. Initialization
Items to initialize................. 597
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners ................ 600
Seat belt instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French)........................ 601
SRS airbag instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French)........................ 603
Abbreviation list ............... 616
Alphabetical index............ 618
What to do if... .................. 630
6Vehicle specifications
7For owners
Index
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
7
8
Pictorial index Exterior
Fog lights
P. 256
Daytime running lights(for Canada)
and headlights
Parking lights
Front side marker lights
P. 250, 253
P. 250
P. 250
Hood
P. 413
Windshield wipers
P. 258
Outside rear view mirrors
P. 121
Moon roof with Solar Panel
P. 126
Front turn signal lights
P. 211
Daytime running lights
(for the U.S.A.)
P. 253
9
Fuel filler door
P. 131
Rear turn signal lights
P. 211
Rear window defoggers
P. 346
Tires
●Rotation
●Replacement
●Inflation pressure
●Information
P. 437
P. 523
P. 569
P. 575
Rear side marker lights
P. 250
Tail lights
P. 250
Camera*
Side doors
P. 87
Back door
P. 93
Rear window wiper
P. 262
: If equipped
*: Refer to “Display Audio System Owner’s Manual”
or “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
License plate lights
P. 250
11
A
Anti-glare inside rear view mirror
Garage door opener switches
P. 118
P. 380
Sun visors
P. 364
SRS curtain shield airbags
P. 140
Rear interior light
P. 355
Vanity mirrors
P. 365
Front interior/personal lights
P. 355
: If equipped
*: Refer to “Display Audio System Owner’s Manual”
or “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
Microphone*
P. 388
“SOS” button
Moon roof switch
Auxiliary box
P. 388
P. 126
P. 363
15
Pictorial index Instrument panel
Headlight switch
Turn signal lever
Fog light switch
P. 250
P. 211
P. 256
Pre-collision braking off switch
P. 304
Parking brake pedal
P. 212
Fuel filler door opener
P. 131
Tire pressure warning reset switch
P. 439
Windshield wipers and
washer switch
Rear window wiper and
washer switch
P. 258
P. 262
Gauges and meters
Multi-information display
P. 214
P. 223
Audio system*2
P. 347
Navigation system*1
SRS driver airbag
Horn
P. 140
P. 213
SRS knee airbag
P. 140
Tilt and telescopic steering control lever
P. 117
: If equipped
*1: Refer to “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
*2: Refer to “Display Audio System Owner’s Manual”.
17
B
Telephone switches*1, 2
“DISP” button
P. 224
Audio remote
control switches*1, 2
Cruise control switch
Dynamic radar cruise control
switch
P. 266
P. 270
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance button
P. 270
Talk switch*1, 2
“TRIP” button
P. 224, 228
Climate remote control switches
P. 337
LKA switch
P. 286
: If equipped
*1: Refer to “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
*2: Refer to “Display Audio System Owner’s Manual”.
21
: If equipped
22
For your information
Main Owner’s Manual
Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equip-
ment, including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for
equipment not installed on your vehicle.
All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing.
However, because of the Toyota policy of continual product improvement, we
reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.
Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ
from your vehicle in terms of color and equipment.
Noise from under vehicle after turning off the hybrid system
Approximately five hours after the hybrid system is turned off, you may hear
sound coming from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound
of a fuel evaporation leakage check and, it does not indicate a malfunction.
Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Toyota
A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Toyota vehi-
cles are currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does
not warrant these products and is not responsible for their performance,
repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse
effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Toyota products. Mod-
ification with non-genuine Toyota products could affect its performance,
safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addi-
tion, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may
not be covered under warranty.
23
Installation of a mobile two-way radio system
The installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect
electronic systems such as:
●Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system
●Cruise control system
●Anti-lock brake system
●SRS airbag system
●Seat belt pretensioner system
Be sure to check with your Toyota dealer for precautionary measures or spe-
cial instructions regarding installation.
High voltage parts and cables on the hybrid vehicles emit approximately the
same amount of electromagnetic waves as the conventional gasoline pow-
ered vehicles or home electronic appliances despite of their electromagnetic
shielding.
Unwanted noise may occur in the reception of the mobile two-way radio.
24
Vehicle control and operation data recording
Your Toyota is equipped with sophisticated computers that record certain
information about your vehicle’s operation, such as:
• Engine speed
• Electric motor speed (traction motor speed)
• Accelerator status
• Brake status
• Vehicle speed
• Shift position
The data recorded varies according to the grade level and options the vehi-
cle is equipped with. The computers do not record conversations, sound or
pictures.
●Data usage
Toyota may use the data recorded in these computers to diagnose malfunc-
tions, conduct research and development, and improve quality.
Toyota will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except:
• With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if
the vehicle is leased
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a govern-
ment agency
• For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or
vehicle owner
●Usage of data collected through Safety Connect (U.S. mainland only)
If your Toyota has Safety Connect and if you have subscribed to those ser-
vices, please refer to the Safety Connect Telematics Subscription Service
Agreement for information on data collected and its usage.
25
Event data recorder
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main pur-
pose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations,
such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed
to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fas-
tened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake
pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situ-
ation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving condi-
tions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine
the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access
to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer,
other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can
read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
26
●Disclosure of the EDR data
Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except
when:
• An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the lessee for a leased vehicle)
is obtained
• In response to official request by the police, a court of law or a govern-
ment agency.
• For use by Toyota in a lawsuit
However, if necessary, Toyota may:
• Use the data for research on vehicle safety performance
• Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing
information about the specific vehicle or vehicle owner
Scrapping of your Toyota
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Toyota contain
explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt
pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be
sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner
removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Toyota
dealer before you scrap your vehicle.
Perchlorate Material
Special handling may apply,
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These compo-
nents may include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote con-
trol batteries.
27
CAUTION
■General precautions while driving
Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influ-
ence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehi-
cle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and
reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that could result in
death or serious injury.
Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other
drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.
Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that dis-
tracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or
reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you,
your occupants or others.
■General precaution regarding children’s safety
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to
have or use the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral.
There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with
the windows, the moon roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat
build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to
children.
■Disposal of the hybrid battery (traction battery)
If your vehicle is disposed of without the hybrid battery (traction battery) hav-
ing been removed, there is a danger of serious electric shock if high voltage
parts, cables and their connectors are touched. In the event that your vehicle
must be disposed of, the hybrid battery (traction battery) must be disposed
of by your Toyota dealer or a qualified service shop. If the hybrid battery
(traction battery) is not disposed of properly, it may cause electric shock that
can result in death or serious injury.
28
Symbols used throughout this manual
Cautions & Notices
Symbols used in illustrations
CAUTION
This is a warning against something which, if ignored, may cause death or
serious injury to people. You are informed about what you must or must not do
in order to reduce the risk of death or serious injury to yourself and others.
NOTICE
This is a warning against something which, if ignored, may cause damage to
the vehicle or its equipment. You are informed about what you must or must
not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your Toyota and its
equipment.
Safety symbol
The symbol of a circle with a slash through it means “Do not”,
“Do not do this”, or “Do not let this happen”.
Arrows indicating operations
Indicates the action (pushing, turn-
ing, etc.) used to operate switches
and other devices.
Indicates the outcome of an opera-
tion (e.g. a lid opens).
ITOPP105
Before driving 1
29
1-1. Hybrid system
Hybrid system features ...... 30
Hybrid system
precautions ...................... 36
Energy monitor/consumption
screen.............................. 42
Hybrid vehicle driving
tips ................................... 56
1-2. Key information
Keys................................... 58
1-3. Opening, closing and
locking the doors
Smart key system
(with entry function) ......... 61
Smart key system
(without entry function) .... 79
Wireless remote
control.............................. 85
Side doors.......................... 87
Back door........................... 93
1-4. Adjustable components
(seats, mirrors, steering
wheel)
Front seats......................... 99
Rear seats........................ 102
Head restraints................. 105
Seat belts......................... 109
Steering wheel ................. 117
Inside rear view mirror ..... 118
Outside rear view
mirrors............................ 121
1-5. Opening and closing the
windows and moon roof
Power windows................ 123
Moon roof with Solar
Panel.............................. 126
1-6. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank
cap ................................. 131
1-7. Theft deterrent system
Immobilizer system .......... 135
Theft prevention labels
(for the U.S.A.)............... 137
1-8. Safety information
Correct driving posture..... 138
SRS airbags..................... 140
Front passenger
occupant classification
system ........................... 154
Child restraint systems..... 160
Installing child
restraints ........................ 165
30
1-1. Hybrid system
Hybrid system features
Your vehicle is a hybrid vehicle. It has characteristics different from
conventional vehicles. Be sure you are closely familiar with the char-
acteristics of your vehicle, and operate with care.
The hybrid system combines the use of a gasoline engine and an
electric motor (traction motor) according to driving conditions,
improving fuel efficiency and reducing exhaust emissions.
Gasoline engine
Electric motor (traction motor)
31
1-1. Hybrid system
1
Before driving
■When stopped/during start off
The gasoline engine stops* when the vehicle is stopped. During
start off, the electric motor (traction motor) drives the vehicle. At
slow speeds or when traveling down a gentle slope, the engine
is stopped* and the electric motor (traction motor) is used.
When shift position is in N, the hybrid battery (traction battery)
will not be charged. Thus, shift to P when the vehicle is stopped.
In addition, when driving in heavy traffic, use D or B.
*: However, when the hybrid battery (traction battery) need to be
charged or while the engine is being warmed up, the gasoline
engine may not stop automatically. (P. 33)
■During normal driving
The gasoline engine is predominantly used. The electric motor
(traction motor) charges the hybrid battery (traction battery) as
necessary.
■When accelerating sharply
When the accelerator pedal is depressed heavily, the power of
the hybrid battery (traction battery) is added to that of the gaso-
line engine via the electric motor (traction motor).
■When braking (regenerative braking)
The electric motor (traction motor) charges the hybrid battery
(traction battery).
32
1-1. Hybrid system
Vehicle proximity notification system
When driving with the gasoline engine stopped, a sound, which
changes in accordance with the driving speed, will be played in order
to warn people nearby of the vehicle’s approach. The sound will stop
when the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 15 mph (25 km/h).
■Regenerative braking
In the following situations, kinetic energy is converted to electric energy and
deceleration force can be obtained in conjunction with the recharging of the
hybrid battery (traction battery).
●The accelerator pedal is released while driving with the shift position in D
or B.
●The brake pedal is depressed while driving with the shift position in D or
B.
■Hybrid System Indicator
Hybrid System Indicator represents the
hybrid system power output and regener-
ative charging. (P. 225)
33
1-1. Hybrid system
1
Before driving
■Conditions in which the gasoline engine may not stop
The gasoline engine starts and stops automatically. However, it may not stop
automatically in the following conditions*:
●During gasoline engine warm-up
●When the temperature of the hybrid battery (traction battery) is high or
low
●During hybrid battery (traction battery) charging
●When the heater is switched on
*: Depending on the circumstances, the gasoline engine may also not stop
automatically in situations other than those above.
■Charging the hybrid battery (traction battery)
●As the gasoline engine charges the hybrid battery (traction battery), the
battery does not need to be charged from an outside source. However, if
the vehicle is left parked for a long time the hybrid battery (traction bat-
tery) will slowly discharge. For this reason, be sure to drive the vehicle at
least once every few months for at least 30 minutes or 10 miles (16 km).
If the hybrid battery (traction battery) becomes fully discharged and you
are unable to jump-start the vehicle with the 12-volt battery, contact your
Toyota dealer.
●If the shift position is in N, the hybrid battery (traction battery) will not be
charged. Always shift the shift position in P when the vehicle is stopped.
When driving in heavy traffic, operate the vehicle with the shift position in
D or B to avoid discharging the hybrid battery (traction battery).
■Charging the 12-volt battery
P. 546
■After the 12-volt battery has discharged or has been changed or
removed
The gasoline engine may not stop even if the vehicle is running on the hybrid
battery (traction battery). If this continues for a few days, contact your Toyota
dealer.
34
1-1. Hybrid system
■Sounds and vibrations specific to a hybrid vehicle
There may be no engine sounds or vibration even though the vehicle is able
to move. For safety, apply the parking brake and make sure to shift the shift
position to P when parked.
The following sounds or vibrations may occur when the hybrid system is
operating and are not a malfunction:
●The brake system operation sound heard from the front of the vehicle
when the driver’s door is opened.
●Motor sounds may be heard from the engine compartment.
●Sounds may be heard from the hybrid battery (traction battery) when the
hybrid system starts or stops.
●Sounds may be heard from the transmission when the gasoline engine
starts or stops, when driving at low speeds, or during idling.
●Engine sounds may be heard when accelerating sharply.
●Sounds may be heard due to regenerative braking when the brake pedal
is depressed and accelerator is loosened.
●Other sounds, such as motors and mechanical noises, may be heard
from the brake system when the brake pedal is depressed.
●Vibration may be felt when the gasoline engine starts or stops.
●Cooling fan sounds may be heard from the air intake vent. (P. 37)
●The operation sound of the air conditioning system (air conditioning com-
pressor, blower motor).
35
1-1. Hybrid system
1
Before driving
■Vehicle proximity notification system
In the following cases, the vehicle proximity notification system may be diffi-
cult for surrounding people to hear.
●In very noisy areas
●In the wind or the rain
Also, as the vehicle proximity notification system is installed on the front of
the vehicle, it may be more difficult to hear from the rear of the vehicle com-
pared to the front.
■Maintenance, repair, recycling, and disposal
Contact your Toyota dealer regarding maintenance, repair, recycling and dis-
posal. Do not dispose of the vehicle yourself.
36
1-1. Hybrid system
Hybrid system precautions
Take care when handling the hybrid system, as it contains a high
voltage system (about 650V at maximum) as well as parts that
become extremely hot when the hybrid system is operating. Obey
the caution labels attached to the vehicle.
Air conditioning compressor
High voltage cables (orange)
Power control unit and DC/
DC converter
Caution label
Service plug
Electric motor (traction
motor)
Hybrid battery (traction bat-
tery)
37
1-1. Hybrid system
1
Before driving
Hybrid battery (traction battery) air vent
There is an air intake vent on the
right side of the rear seatback for
the purpose of cooling the hybrid
battery (traction battery). If the
vent becomes blocked, the
hybrid battery (traction battery)
may overheat, leading to a
reduction in hybrid battery (trac-
tion battery) output.
Emergency shut off system
When a certain level of impact is detected by the impact sensor, the
emergency shut off system blocks off the high voltage current and
stops the fuel pump to minimize the risk of electrocution and fuel
leakage. If the emergency shut off system activates, your vehicle will
not restart. To restart the hybrid system, contact your Toyota dealer.
Hybrid warning message
A message is automatically displayed when a malfunction occurs in
the hybrid system or an improper operation is attempted.
If a warning message is shown
on the multi-information display,
read the message and follow the
instructions. (P. 507)
38
1-1. Hybrid system
■If a warning light comes on, a warning message is displayed or the 12-
volt battery is disconnected
The hybrid system may not start. In that case, try to start the system again. If
the “READY” indicator does not come on, contact your Toyota dealer.
■Running out of fuel
When the vehicle has run out of fuel and the hybrid system cannot be
started, refuel the vehicle with at least enough gasoline to make the low fuel
level warning light (P. 498) go off. If there is only a small amount of fuel,
the hybrid system may not be able to start. (The minimum amount of fuel to
add to make the low fuel level warning light go out is about 1.9 gal. [7.1 L,
1.6 Imp.gal.], when the vehicle is on a level surface. This value may vary
when the vehicle is on a slope.)
■Electromagnetic waves
●High voltage parts and cables on the hybrid vehicles incorporate electro-
magnetic shielding, and therefore emit approximately the same amount
of electromagnetic waves as conventional gasoline powered vehicles or
home electronic appliances.
●Your vehicle may cause sound interference in some third party-produced
radio parts.
■Hybrid battery (traction battery)
The hybrid battery (traction battery) has a limited service life. The lifespan of
the hybrid battery (traction battery) can change in accordance with driving
style and driving conditions.
39
1-1. Hybrid system
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■High voltage precautions
The vehicle has high voltage DC and AC systems as well as a 12-volt sys-
tem. DC and AC high voltage is very dangerous and can cause severe burns
and electric shock that may result in death or serious injury.
●Never touch, disassemble, remove or replace the high voltage parts,
cables or their connectors.
●The hybrid system will become hot after starting as the system uses high
voltage. Be careful of both the high voltage and the high temperature, and
always obey the caution labels attached to the vehicle.
●Never try to open the service plug
access hole located in the luggage
compartment. The service plug is used
only when the vehicle is serviced and is
subject to high voltage.
40
1-1. Hybrid system
CAUTION
■Road accident cautions
If your vehicle is involved in an accident, observe the following precautions
to reduce the risk of death or serious injury:
●Stop the vehicle in a safe place to prevent subsequent accidents.
While depressing the brake pedal, apply the parking brake, shift the shift
position to P and turn the hybrid system off. Then, slowly release the brake
pedal.
●Do not touch the high voltage parts, cables and connectors.
●If electric wires are exposed inside or outside your vehicle, an electric
shock may occur. Never touch exposed electric wires.
●If a fluid leak occurs, do not touch the fluid as it may be strong alkaline
electrolyte from the hybrid battery (traction battery). If it comes into contact
with your skin or eyes, wash it off immediately with a large amount of water
or, if possible, boric acid solution. Seek immediate medical attention.
●If a fire occurs in the hybrid vehicle, leave the vehicle as soon as possible.
Never use a fire extinguisher that is not meant for electric fires. Using even
a small amount of water may be dangerous.
●If your vehicle needs to be towed, do so with front wheels raised. If the
wheels connected to the electric motor (traction motor) are on the ground
when towing, the motor may continue to generate electricity. This may
cause an electricity leakage leading to a fire. (P. 485)
●Carefully inspect the ground under the vehicle. If you find that liquid has
leaked onto the ground, the fuel system may have been damaged. Leave
the vehicle as soon as possible.
■Hybrid battery (traction battery)
Your vehicle contains a sealed nickel-metal hydride battery. If disposed of
improperly, it is hazardous to the environment and there is a risk of severe
burns and electrical shock that may result in death or serious injury.
41
1-1. Hybrid system
1
Before driving
NOTICE
■Hybrid battery (traction battery) air vent
●Do not put foreign objects near the air vent. The hybrid battery (traction
battery) may overheat and be damaged.
●Clean the air vent regularly to prevent the hybrid battery (traction battery)
from overheating.
●Do not wet or allow foreign substances to enter the air vent as this may
cause a short circuit and damage the hybrid battery (traction battery).
●Do not carry large amounts of water such as water cooler bottles in the
vehicle. If water spills onto the hybrid battery (traction battery), the battery
may be damaged. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
●If the rear seat belt becomes separated from the guide (P. 103), it could
obstruct the hybrid battery (traction battery) air vent. Set the rear seat belt
into the guide to use.
42
1-1. Hybrid system
Energy monitor/consumption screen
Energy monitor
Displays the flow of energy as it changes in accordance with driving
conditions.
Display Audio system
Press “CAR”.
If the “Consumption” screen is
displayed, touch “Energy”.
You can view the status of your hybrid system on the Display Audio
system screen, the navigation system screen or the multi-informa-
tion display.
Display Audio system
screen or navigation system
screen
Multi-information display
43
1-1. Hybrid system
1
Before driving
Condition Display
When the vehicle is powered by
the electric motor (traction
motor)
When the vehicle is powered by
both the gasoline engine and the
electric motor (traction motor)
When the vehicle is powered by
the gasoline engine
44
1-1. Hybrid system
These images are examples only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.
Condition Display
When the vehicle is charging the
hybrid battery (traction battery)
When there is no energy flow
Hybrid battery (traction battery)
status
Low Full
45
1-1. Hybrid system
1
Before driving
Navigation system
Press “INFO APPS” or “INFO”.
Touch “Fuel Consumption” on
the “Information” screen.
If the “Consumption” screen is
displayed, touch “Energy”.
STEP
1
STEP
2
46
1-1. Hybrid system
Condition Display
When the vehicle is powered by
the electric motor (traction
motor)
When the vehicle is powered by
both the gasoline engine and the
electric motor (traction motor)
When the vehicle is powered by
the gasoline engine
47
1-1. Hybrid system
1
Before driving
These images are examples only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.
Condition Display
When the vehicle is charging the
hybrid battery (traction battery)
When there is no energy flow
Hybrid battery (traction battery)
status
Low Full
48
1-1. Hybrid system
Multi-information display
Press the “DISP” button to dis-
play the energy monitor.
■Names and meaning of each icons
Gasoline engine
Hybrid battery (traction bat-
tery)
Electric motor (traction motor)
Condition Display
When the vehicle is powered by
the electric motor (traction
motor)
When the vehicle is powered by
both the gasoline engine and the
electric motor (traction motor)
49
1-1. Hybrid system
1
Before driving
These images are examples only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.
Condition Display
When the vehicle is powered by
the gasoline engine
When the vehicle is charging the
hybrid battery (traction battery)
When there is no energy flow
Hybrid battery (traction battery)
status
Low Full
50
1-1. Hybrid system
Consumption screen
Display Audio system
Press “CAR”.
If the “Energy Monitor” screen is displayed, touch “Consumption”.
Fuel consumption in the past
30 minutes
Cruising range (P. 55)
Regenerated energy in the
past 30 minutes
One symbol indicates 30 Wh. Up
to 4 symbols are shown.
The image is example only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.
Navigation system
Press “INFO APPS” or “INFO”.
Touch “Fuel Consumption” on the “Information” screen.
If the “Energy Monitor” screen is displayed, touch “Consumption”.
Fuel consumption in the past
30 minutes
Regenerated energy in the
past 30 minutes
One symbol indicates 30 Wh. Up
to 4 symbols are shown.
Cruising range (P. 55)
The image is example only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.
STEP
1
STEP
2
51
1-1. Hybrid system
1
Before driving
Multi-information display
Press the “DISP” button to dis-
play the 5-minute or 1-minute
fuel consumption display.
Press and hold the “DISP” button
to switch between 5-minute and
1-minute fuel consumption dis-
plays.
The display will alternate with
each press of the button.
5-minute interval fuel consumption
Fuel consumption
Displays the average fuel con-
sumption for the last 30 minutes
in intervals of 5 minutes or the
last 15 minutes in intervals of 1
minute.
Regenerated energy
Displays the amount of energy
generated over the last 30 min-
utes in intervals of 5 minutes or
the last 15 minutes in intervals of
1 minute.
One symbol indicates 50 Wh (5-
minute interval display) or 30 Wh
(1-minute interval display).
Up to 8 symbols are shown.
1-minute interval fuel
consumption
52
1-1. Hybrid system
EV indicator*1
Eco Driving Indicator Light*1
Average speed*2
Average fuel consumption/eco
savings*2
Use the displayed average fuel
consumption as a reference.
*1: P. 225
*2:The current amount since the trip
meter was reset will be displayed.
These functions can be reset by
pressing and holding the “TRIP”
button when either the 5-minute
or 1-minute interval fuel con-
sumption display is being shown.
The display can be switched
between average fuel consump-
tion/average speed and eco sav-
ings. (P. 232)
53
1-1. Hybrid system
1
Before driving
Monthly fuel consumption record/Eco savings record (multi-
information display only)
Press the “DISP” button to dis-
play the monthly fuel consump-
tion record or eco savings
record.
Press and hold the “DISP” button
to switch the display between
monthly fuel consumption record
and eco savings record.
The display will alternate with
each press of the button.
Monthly fuel consumption record display
Displays the average fuel consumption for the previous 6 months.
Average fuel consumption for
the previous 6 months
EV indicator*
Eco Driving Indicator Light*
Driving distance for each
month
*:P. 225
54
1-1. Hybrid system
Eco savings record display
By setting the comparison consumption and the gasoline value
beforehand (P. 231), the difference is calculated when the actual
consumption is less than the comparison consumption, and the
amount of money saved is displayed*1.
If the comparison consumption is set to 0, the consumption cost is
displayed*1.
*1: The displayed amount is intended only as a guide and may differ from
the actual amount.
Savings or consumption costs
for the previous 6 months
EV indicator*2
Eco Driving Indicator Light*2
Driving distance for each
month
*2: P. 225
■Remaining hybrid battery (traction battery) charge display
The charge amount of the hybrid battery (traction battery) is automatically
controlled by the hybrid system. For this reason, even if electricity is recov-
ered via the regenerative braking, or electricity is generated via the gasoline
engine, the displayed hybrid battery (traction battery) charge amount may
not reach the highest level (level 8). However, this does not indicate a mal-
function.
55
1-1. Hybrid system
1
Before driving
■Resetting the consumption data
Display Audio system
Selecting “Clear” on the “Consumption” screen will reset the fuel consump-
tion and the regenerated energy for the past 30 minutes.
Selecting “Yes” on the following screen will confirm resetting of all the data.
Navigation system
Selecting “Clear” on the “Consumption” screen will reset the fuel consump-
tion and the regenerated energy for the past 30 minutes.
Selecting “Yes” on the following screen will confirm resetting of all the data.
Multi-information display
If the “POWER” switch is turned OFF, average fuel consumption and regen-
erated energy data will be reset.
■Resetting the monthly fuel consumption/eco savings record
Press and hold the “TRIP” button while the monthly fuel consumption/eco
savings record is displayed.
A confirmation message will be displayed.
Press and hold the “TRIP” button to reset the data.
Press the “DISP” button to cancel the reset operation. The screen will return
to the previous display if no buttons are pressed for approximately 10 sec-
onds.
■Cruising range
Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quan-
tity of fuel remaining.
This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption.
As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that dis-
played.
■Odometer/trip meter/distance to empty
The odometer/trip meter/distance to empty will not be displayed while the
monthly fuel consumption record or the eco savings record is being dis-
played.
56
1-1. Hybrid system
Hybrid vehicle driving tips
For economical and ecological driving, pay attention to the
following points:
■Using Eco drive mode
When using Eco drive mode, the torque corresponding to the
accelerator pedal depression amount can be generated more
smoothly than it is in normal conditions. In addition, the opera-
tion of the air conditioning system (heating/cooling) will be mini-
mized, improving the fuel economy. (P. 204)
■Use of Hybrid System Indicator
Eco-friendly driving is possible by keeping the indicate of Hybrid
System Indicator within Eco area. (P. 225)
■When braking the vehicle
Make sure to operate the brakes gently and in good time. A
greater amount of electrical energy can be retained when slow-
ing down.
■Delays
Repeated acceleration and deceleration, as well as long waits at
traffic lights, will lead to bad fuel consumption. Check traffic
reports before leaving and avoid delays as much as possible.
When encountering a delay, gently release the brake pedal to
allow the vehicle to move forward slightly while avoiding overuse
of the accelerator pedal. Doing so can help control excessive
gasoline consumption.
■Highway driving
Control your speed and keep at a constant speed. Also, before
stopping at a toll booth or similar, allow plenty of time to release
the accelerator and gently apply the brakes. A greater amount of
electrical energy can be retained when slowing down.
57
1-1. Hybrid system
1
Before driving
■Air conditioning on/off
Switch the air conditioning ( ) to off when it is not needed.
Doing so can help control excessive gasoline consumption.
In summer: In high temperatures, use the recirculated air mode.
Doing so will help to reduce the burden on the air conditioner
and reduce fuel consumption as well.
In winter: Because the gasoline engine will not automatically cut
out until the gasoline engine and the interior of the vehicle are
warm, it will consume fuel. Also, fuel consumption can be
improved by avoiding overuse of the heater.
■Checking tire inflation pressure
Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure frequently.
Improper tire inflation pressure can cause poor fuel consump-
tion.
Also, as snow tires can cause large amounts of friction, their use
on dry roads can lead to poor fuel consumption. Use a tire that is
appropriate for the season.
■Luggage
Carrying heavy luggage can lead to poor fuel consumption.
Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage. Installing a large roof rack
can also cause poor fuel consumption.
■Warming up before driving
Since the gasoline engine starts up and cuts out automatically
when cold, warming up the engine is unnecessary. Moreover,
frequently driving short distances will cause the engine to
repeatedly warm up, which can lead to poor fuel consumption.
58
1-2. Key information
Keys
Using the mechanical key
To take out the mechanical key,
push the release button and take
the key out.
After using the mechanical key,
store it in the electronic key. Carry
the mechanical key together with
the electronic key. If the electronic
key battery is depleted or the
entry function does not operate
properly, you will need the
mechanical key. (P. 541)
The following keys are provided with the vehicle.
Electronic keys
• Operating the smart key
system (P. 61, 79)
• Operating the wireless
remote control function
(P. 85)
• Operating the Remote Air
Conditioning System*
(P. 342)
Mechanical keys
Key number plate
*: If equipped
59
1-2. Key information
1
Before driving
■Key number plate
Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle. In the
event that a mechanical key is lost, a new key can be made at your Toyota
dealer using the key number plate. (P. 540)
■When riding in an aircraft
When bringing an electronic key onto an aircraft, make sure you do not
press any buttons on the electronic key while inside the aircraft cabin. If you
are carrying an electronic key in your bag etc., ensure that the buttons are
not likely to be pressed accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the elec-
tronic key to emit radio waves that could interfere with the operation of the
aircraft.
60
1-2. Key information
NOTICE
■To prevent key damage
Observe the following:
●Do not drop the keys, subject them to strong shocks or bend them.
●Do not expose the keys to high temperatures for long periods of time.
●Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer etc.
●Do not attach metallic or magnetic materials to the keys or place the keys
close to such materials.
●Do not disassemble the keys.
●Do not attach a sticker or anything else to the surface of the electronic key.
●Do not place the keys near objects that produce magnetic fields, such as
TVs, audio systems and glass top ranges, or medical electrical equipment,
such as low-frequency therapy equipment.
■Carrying the electronic key on your person
Carry the electronic key 3.9 in. (10 cm) or more away from electric appli-
ances that are turned on. Radio waves emitted from electric appliances
within 3.9 in. (10 cm) of the electronic key may interfere with the key, causing
the key to not function properly.
■In case of a smart key system malfunction or other key-related prob-
lems
Take your vehicle with all the electronic keys provided with your vehicle to
your Toyota dealer.
■When a vehicle key is lost
If the key remains lost, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly. Visit
your Toyota dealer immediately with all remaining electronic keys that was
provided with your vehicle.
61
1
Before driving
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Smart key system (with entry function)
The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the
electronic key on your person, for example in your pocket.
(The driver should always carry the electronic key.)
Unlocks and locks the side doors (P. 62)
Unlocks and locks the back door (P. 63)
Starts and stops the hybrid system (P. 192)
62
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Unlocking and locking the doors
Front door handles (including front passenger door handle if
equipped with entry function)
Grip the driver’s door handle to
unlock the door. Grip the passen-
ger’s door handle to unlock all
the doors.*
Make sure to touch the sensor on
the back of the handle.
The doors cannot be unlocked for
3 seconds after the doors are
locked.
*: The door unlock settings can be
changed. (P. 70)
Touch the lock sensor (the
indentation on the upper part of
the door handle) to lock the
doors.
63
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
Back door (vehicles with entry function of front and back doors)
Press the unlock button to
unlock all the doors.
The doors cannot be unlocked for
3 seconds after the doors are
locked.
Press the lock button to lock all
the doors.
64
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Antenna location and effective range
■Antenna location
Vehicles with entry function of driver’s door
Antennas outside cabin
Antennas inside cabin
Vehicles with entry function of front and back doors
Antennas outside the cabin
Antennas inside the cabin
Antenna outside the luggage
compartment
65
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
■Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is
detected)
Vehicles with entry function of driver’s door
When locking or unlocking
the door
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is
within about 2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of
driver’s door handle.
When starting the hybrid
system or changing
“POWER” switch modes
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is
inside the vehicle.
Vehicles with entry function of front and back doors
When locking or unlocking
the doors
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is
within about 2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of
either of the outside front
door handle and back door
opener switch. (Only the
doors detecting the key can
be operated.)
When starting the hybrid
system or changing
“POWER” switch modes
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is
inside the vehicle.
66
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
■Operation signals
A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors
have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)
■When the door cannot be locked by the lock sensor on the upper part
of the door handle
If the door will not lock even when the
topside sensor area is touched, try touch-
ing both the topside and underside sen-
sor areas at the same time.
67
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
■Alarms and warning lights
A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warning lights are
used to prevent theft of the vehicle and accidents resulting from erroneous
operation. Take appropriate measures in response to any warning message
shown on the multi-information display. (P. 517)
The following table describes circumstances and correction procedures
when only alarms are sounded.
Alarm Situation Correction procedure
Interior alarm
pings once and
exterior alarm
sounds once for
5 seconds*1
An attempt was made to
lock the doors using the
entry function while the
electronic key was still
inside the passenger com-
partment
Retrieve the elec-
tronic key from the
passenger compart-
ment and lock the
doors again
An attempt was made to
exit the vehicle and lock
the doors without first turn-
ing the “POWER” switch
off
Turn the “POWER”
switch off and lock the
doors again
Exterior alarm
sounds once for
5 seconds
An attempt was made to
lock the vehicle while a
door is open
Close all of the doors
and lock the doors
again
68
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Alarm Situation Correction procedure
Interior alarm
pings continu-
ously*1
The “POWER” switch was
turned to ACCESSORY
mode while the driver’s
door was open (or the
driver’s door was opened
while the “POWER” switch
was in ACCESSORY
mode)
Turn the “POWER”
switch off and close
the driver’s door
Interior alarm
sounds continu-
ously*1
When the “POWER”
switch is in ON mode or
ACCESSORY mode, an
attempt was made to open
the door and exit the vehi-
cle, and the shift position
was not in P
Shift the shift position
to P and turn the
“POWER” switch off
Interior and exte-
rior alarms sound
continuously*1
When the “POWER”
switch is in ON mode or
ACCESSORY mode, the
driver’s door was closed
after the key was carried
outside the vehicle, and
the shift position not in P
Shift the shift position
to P, turn the
“POWER” switch off
and close the driver’s
door again
69
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
*1: A message will be shown on the multi-information display in the instru-
ment cluster.
*2: If the hybrid system does not start when the electronic key is inside the
vehicle, the electronic key battery may be depleted or there may be dif-
ficulties receiving signal from the key. (P. 541)
Alarm Situation Correction procedure
Interior alarm
pings once*1
The electronic key has a
low battery
Replace the electronic
key battery
An attempt was made to
start the hybrid system
without the electronic key
being present, or the elec-
tronic key was not func-
tioning normally
Start the hybrid sys-
tem with the elec-
tronic key present*2
Interior alarm
pings once and
exterior alarm
sounds 3 times*1
The driver’s door was
closed after the key was
carried outside the vehicle,
and the “POWER” switch
was not turned OFF
Turn the “POWER”
switch off and close
the driver’s door again
An occupant carried the
electronic key outside the
vehicle and closed the
door while the “POWER”
switch was not OFF
Bring the electronic
key back into the vehi-
cle
70
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
■Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is
unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.
■Switching the door unlock function
It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks.
Turn the “POWER” switch off.
When the indicator on the key surface is turned off, push and hold
or for approximately 5 seconds while pushing the but-
ton on the key.
The setting changes each time an operation is performed, as shown below.
(When changing the setting continuously, release the buttons, wait for at
least 5 seconds, and repeat .)
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
2
Multi-information
display Unlocking doors Beep
Hold the driver’s door
handle to unlock only the
driver’s door. Exterior: Beeps three
times
Interior: Pings once
Hold the passenger’s door
handle or back door
opener to unlock all the
doors.
Hold the front door handle
or back door opener to
unlock all the doors.
Exterior: Beeps twice
Interior: Pings once
71
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
■Battery-saving function
The battery-saving function will be activated in order to prevent the elec-
tronic key battery and the 12-volt battery from being discharged while the
vehicle is not in operation for a long time.
●In the following situations, the smart key system may take some time to
unlock the doors.
• The electronic key has been left in an area of approximately 6 ft. (2 m)
of the outside of the vehicle for 10 minutes or longer.
• The smart key system has not been used for 5 days or longer.
●If the smart key system has not been used for 14 days or longer, the
doors cannot be unlocked at any doors except the driver’s door. In this
case, take hold of the driver’s door handle, or use the wireless remote
control or the mechanical key, to unlock the doors.
72
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
■Conditions affecting operation
The smart key system, wireless remote control and immobilizer system use
weak radio waves. In the following situations, the communication between
the electronic key and the vehicle may be affected, preventing the smart key
system, wireless remote control and immobilizer system from operating
properly. (Ways of coping: P. 541)
●When the electronic key battery is depleted
●Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large dis-
play, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electri-
cal noise
●When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other
wireless communication devices
●When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following
metallic objects
• Cards to which aluminum foil is attached
• Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside
• Metallic wallets or bags
• Coins
• Hand warmers made of metal
• Media such as CDs and DVDs
●When other wireless key (that emit radio waves) is being used nearby
●When carrying the electronic key together with the following devices that
emit radio waves
• Another vehicle’s electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio
waves
• Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs)
• Digital audio players
• Portable game systems
●If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to
the rear window
73
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
■Note for the entry function
●Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection
areas), the system may not operate properly in the following cases:
• The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle,
near the ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or
unlocked.
• The electronic key is on the instrument panel, luggage cover, floor, or in
the door pockets or glove box when the hybrid system is started or
“POWER” switch modes are changed.
●Do not leave the electronic key on top of the instrument panel or near the
door pockets when exiting the vehicle. Depending on the radio wave
reception conditions, it may be detected by the antenna outside the cabin
and the door will become lockable from the outside, possibly trapping the
electronic key inside the vehicle.
●As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may
be locked or unlocked by anyone.
●Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to
start the hybrid system if the electronic key is near the window.
●The doors may unlock if a large amount of water splashes on the door
handle, such as in the rain or in a car wash when the electronic key is
within the effective range. (The door will automatically be locked after
approximately 60 seconds if the doors are not opened and closed.)
●If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the elec-
tronic key is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not
be unlocked by the entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to
unlock the doors.)
74
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
■Note for locking the doors
●Touching the door lock sensor while wearing gloves may delay or prevent
lock operation. Remove the gloves and touch the lock sensor again.
●When the lock operation is performed using the lock sensor, recognition
signals will be shown up to two consecutive times. After this, no recogni-
tion signals will be given.
●If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the
effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. Place the key
in a position 6 ft. (2 m) or more separate from the vehicle while the vehi-
cle is being washed. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)
●If the electronic key is inside the vehicle and a door handle becomes wet
during a car wash, a buzzer will sound outside the vehicle. To turn off the
alarm, lock all the doors.
●The lock sensor may not work properly if it comes into contact with ice,
snow, mud, etc. Clean the lock sensor and attempt to operate it again, or
use the lock sensor on the lower part of the door handle.
●Fingernails may scrape against the door during operation of the door
handle. Be careful not to injure fingernails or damage the surface of the
door.
75
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
■Note for the unlocking function
●A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle may prevent the
doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the
original position and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door
handle again.
●Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door.
Remove the gloves and touch the sensor on the back of the door handle
again.
●If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the
effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. Place the key
in a position 6 ft. (2 m) or more separate from the vehicle while the vehi-
cle is being washed. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)
●If there is another electronic key in the detection area, it may take slightly
longer to unlock the doors after the door handle is gripped.
●Fingernails may scrape against the door during operation of the door
handle. Be careful not to injure fingernails or damage the surface of the
door.
■When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods
●To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft.
(2 m) of the vehicle.
●The smart key system can be deactivated in advance. (P. 590)
■To operate the system properly
Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get
the electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from
the outside of the vehicle.
Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the
key may not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly.
(The door lock prevention may not operate.)
76
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
■If the smart key system does not operate properly
●Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the mechanical key. (P. 541)
●Starting the hybrid system: P. 542
■Electronic key battery depletion
●The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years.
●If the battery becomes low, an alarm will sound in the cabin when the
hybrid system stops. (P. 67)
●As the electronic key always receives radio waves, the battery will
become depleted even if the electronic key is not used. The following
symptoms indicate that the electronic key battery may be depleted.
Replace the battery when necessary. (P. 454)
• The smart key system or the wireless remote control does not operate.
• The detection area becomes smaller.
• The LED indicator on the key surface does not turn on.
●To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft.
(1 m) of the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field:
•TVs
• Personal computers
• Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers
• Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones
• Glass top ranges
• Table lamps
■When the electronic key battery is fully depleted
P. 454
■Customization
Settings (e.g. smart key system) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 590)
77
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
■Certification for the smart key system
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: NI4TMLF8-2
FCC ID: HYQ14ACX FCC ID: HYQ14ADF
FCC ID: HYQ13CZD FCC ID: HYQ13CZE
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
78
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
CAUTION
■Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
●People with implanted pacemakers or cardiac defibrillators should keep
away from the smart key system antennas. (P. 64)
The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary,
the entry function can be disabled. Ask your Toyota dealer for details, such
as the frequency of radio waves and timing of emitting the radio waves.
Then, consult your doctor to see if you should disable the entry function.
●Users of any electrical medical device other than implanted pacemakers
and implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the
device for information about its operation under the influence of radio
waves.
Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such
medical devices.
Ask your Toyota dealer for details on disabling the entry function.
On vehicles with the Display Audio system or the navigation system, the
entry function can be disabled personally. (P. 590)
79
1
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Before driving
Smart key system (without entry function)
Starting and stopping the hybrid system can be performed simply by
carrying the electronic key on your person, for example in your
pocket.
(The driver should always carry the electronic key.)
80
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Antenna location and effective range
■Antenna location
Antennas inside cabin
■Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is
detected)
When starting the hybrid system
or changing “POWER” switch
modes
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is inside
the vehicle.
81
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
■Conditions affecting operation
P. 72
■Electronic key battery depletion
P. 76
■To operate the system properly
Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system.
Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the
key may not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly.
(The door lock prevention may not operate.)
■Note for the smart key system
●Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection
areas), the system may not operate properly.
For example, the electronic key is on the instrument panel, luggage
cover, floor or in the door pockets or glove box when the hybrid system is
started or “POWER” switch modes are changed.
●Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to
start the hybrid system if the electronic key is near the window.
82
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
■Alarms and warning indicators
A combination of exterior and interior alarms are used to prevent theft of the
vehicle and unforeseeable accidents resulting from erroneous operation.
Take appropriate measures in response to any warning message shown on
the multi-information display. (P. 517)
The following table describes circumstances and correction procedures
when only alarms are sounded.
Alarm Situation Correction procedure
Exterior alarm
sounds once for
5 seconds
An attempt was made to
lock the vehicle while a
door is open
Close all of the doors
and lock the doors
again
Interior alarm
pings continu-
ously*1
The “POWER” switch was
turned to ACCESSORY
mode while the driver’s
door was open (or the
driver’s door was opened
while the “POWER” switch
was in ACCESSORY
mode)
Turn the “POWER”
switch off and close
the driver’s door
Interior alarm
sounds continu-
ously*1
When the “POWER”
switch is in ON mode or
ACCESSORY mode, an
attempt was made to open
the door and exit the vehi-
cle, and the shift position
was not in P
Shift the shift position
to P and turn the
“POWER” switch off
Interior and exte-
rior alarms sound
continuously*1
When the “POWER”
switch is in ON mode or
ACCESSORY mode, the
driver’s door was closed
after the key was carried
outside the vehicle, and
the shift position not in P
Shift the shift position
to P, turn the
“POWER” switch off
and close the driver’s
door again
83
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
*1: A message will be shown on the multi-information display in the instru-
ment cluster.
*2: If the hybrid system does not start when the electronic key is inside the
vehicle, the electronic key battery may be depleted or there may be dif-
ficulties receiving signal from the key. (P. 541)
■If the electronic key does not operate properly
P. 541
■When the electronic key battery is fully depleted
P. 454
■Customization
Settings (e.g. smart key system) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 590)
Alarm Situation Correction procedure
Interior alarm
pings once*1
The electronic key has a
low battery
Replace the electronic
key battery
An attempt was made to
start the hybrid system
without the electronic key
being present, or the elec-
tronic key was not func-
tioning normally
Start the hybrid sys-
tem with the elec-
tronic key present*2
Interior alarm
pings once and
exterior alarm
sounds 3 times*1
The driver’s door was
closed after the key was
carried outside the vehicle,
and the “POWER” switch
was not turned OFF
Turn the “POWER”
switch off and close
the driver’s door again
An occupant carried the
electronic key outside the
vehicle and closed the
door while the “POWER”
switch was not OFF
Bring the electronic
key back into the vehi-
cle
84
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
■Certification for the smart key system
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: NI4TMLF8-2
FCC ID: HYQ14ACX FCC ID: HYQ14ADF
FCC ID: HYQ13CZD FCC ID: HYQ13CZE
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
CAUTION
■Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
P. 78
85
1
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Before driving
Wireless remote control
■Operation signals
A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors
have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)
■Door lock buzzer (vehicles with entry function)
If an attempt to lock the doors is made when a door is not fully closed, a
buzzer sounds continuously for 5 seconds. Fully close the door to stop the
buzzer, and lock the vehicle once more.
The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehi-
cle.
Locks all the doors
Unlocks all the doors
Pressing the button unlocks
the driver’s door. Pressing the
button again within 3 seconds
unlocks the other doors.
Operates Remote Air Con-
ditioning System*
(P. 342)
Sounds the alarm
(press and hold) (P. 86)
*: If equipped
86
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
■Panic mode
■Security feature
P. 70
■Conditions affecting operation
P. 72
■If the wireless remote control does not operate properly
Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the mechanical key. (P. 541)
■Electronic key battery depletion
P. 76
■When the electronic key battery is fully depleted
P. 454
■Customization
Settings (e.g. door unlocking function) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 590)
When is pressed for longer than
about one second, an alarm will sound
intermittently and the vehicle lights will
flash to deter any person from trying to
break into or damage your vehicle.
To stop the alarm, press any button on
the electronic key.
87
1
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Before driving
Side doors
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the entry function,
wireless remote control or door lock switch.
■Entry function (if equipped)
P. 61
■Wireless remote control
P. 85
■Door lock switch
Locks all the doors
Unlocks all the doors
■Inside lock buttons
Locks the door
Unlocks the door
The front doors can be opened
by pulling the inside handle
even if the lock buttons are in
the lock position.
88
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Locking the front doors from the outside without a key
Move the inside lock button to the lock position.
Close the door.
The door cannot be locked if the “POWER” switch is in ACCESSORY
or ON mode, or the electronic key is left inside the vehicle.
The key may not be detected correctly and the door may be locked.
Rear door child-protector lock
The door cannot be opened from
inside the vehicle when the lock
is set.
Unlock
Lock
These locks can be set to prevent
children from opening the rear
doors. Push down on each rear
door switch to lock both rear
doors.
STEP
1
STEP
2
89
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
Automatic door locking and unlocking systems
The following functions can be set or canceled:
■Setting and canceling the functions
To switch between setting and canceling, follow the procedure
below:
Close all the doors and switch the “POWER” switch to ON
mode. (Perform within 20 seconds.)
Function Operation
Shift position linked
door locking function
Shifting the shift position out of P locks all
doors.
Shift position linked
door unlocking function
Shifting the shift position to P unlocks all
doors.
Speed linked door lock-
ing function
All doors are locked when the vehicle speed is
approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) or higher.
Driver’s door linked door
unlocking function
All doors are unlocked when the driver’s door
is opened within 10 seconds after turning the
“POWER” switch off.
STEP
1
STEP
2
90
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Shift the shift position to P or N,
and press and hold the door lock
switch ( or ) for about 5
seconds then release.
The shift position corresponding
to the desired function to be set
are shown as follows.
Use the same procedure to can-
cel the function.
When the setting or canceling operation is complete, all doors are
locked and then unlocked.
STEP
2
Function Shift position Door lock switch
position
Shift position linked door lock-
ing function P
Shift position linked door
unlocking function
Speed linked door locking func-
tion N
Driver’s door linked door unlock-
ing function
91
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
■Using the mechanical key
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key.
(P. 541)
■If a wrong key is used
The key cylinder rotates freely to isolate inside mechanism.
■Customization
Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 590)
92
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
CAUTION
■To prevent an accident
Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out,
resulting in death or serious injury.
●Always use a seat belt.
●Always lock all the doors.
●Ensure that all doors are properly closed.
●Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.
The doors may be opened and the passengers are thrown out of the vehi-
cle and it may result in serious injury or death.
Be especially careful for the front doors, as the doors may be opened even
if the inside lock buttons are in locked position.
●Set the rear door child-protector locks when children are seated in the rear
seats.
■When opening or closing a door
Check the surroundings of the vehicle such as whether the vehicle is on an
incline, whether there is enough space for a door to open and whether a
strong wind is blowing. When opening or closing the door, hold the door han-
dle tightly to prepare for any unpredictable movement.
93
1
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Before driving
Back door
When closing the back door
Lower the back door using the
back door handle, and make
sure to push the back door down
from the outside to close it.
Be careful not to pull the back
door sideways when closing the
back door with the handle.
The back door can be locked/unlocked and opened by the following
procedures.
■Locking and unlocking the back door
Entry function
P. 61
Wireless remote control
P. 85
Door lock switch
P. 87
■Opening the back door from outside the vehicle
Raise the back door while
pushing up the back door
opener switch.
94
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
■Luggage compartment light
The luggage compartment light turns on when the back door is opened with
the luggage compartment light switch on.
■If the back door opener is inoperative
The back door can be unlocked from the inside.
Open the center deck board. (P. 374)
On
Off
STEP
1
Remove the cover. (vehicles with center
auxiliary box type B only)
Move the lever.
STEP
2
STEP
3
95
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
●Keep the back door closed while driving.
If the back door is left open, it may hit near-by objects while driving or lug-
gage may be unexpectedly thrown out, causing an accident.
In addition, exhaust gases may enter the vehicle, causing death or a seri-
ous health hazard. Make sure to close the back door before driving.
●Before driving the vehicle, make sure that the back door is fully closed. If
the back door is not fully closed, it may open unexpectedly while driving,
causing an accident.
●Never let anyone sit in the luggage compartment. In the event of sudden
braking, sudden swerving or a collision, they are susceptible to death or
serious injury.
■When children are in the vehicle
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●Do not leave children alone in the luggage compartment.
If a child is accidentally locked in the luggage compartment, they could
have heat exhaustion.
●Do not allow a child to open or close the back door.
Doing so may cause the back door to move unexpectedly, or cause the
child’s hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing back door.
96
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
CAUTION
■Operating the back door
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in death
or serious injury.
●Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the back door
before opening it. Failure to do so may cause the back door to fall closed
again after it is opened.
●When opening or closing the back door, thoroughly check to make sure
the surrounding area is safe.
●If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that
the back door is about to open or close.
●Use caution when opening or closing the back door in windy weather as it
may move abruptly in strong wind.
●The back door may fall if it is not
opened fully. It is more difficult to open
or close the back door on an incline
than on a level surface, so beware of
the back door unexpectedly opening or
closing by itself. Make sure that the
back door is fully open and secure
before using the luggage compartment.
97
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
1
Before driving
CAUTION
●Do not pull on the back door damper stay to close the back door, and do
not hang on the back door damper stay.
Doing so may cause hands to be caught or the back door damper stay to
break, causing an accident.
●If a bicycle carrier or similar heavy object is attached to the back door, it
may fall closed again after being opened, causing someone’s hands, head
or neck to be caught and injured. When installing an accessory part to the
back door, using a genuine Toyota part is recommended.
●When closing the back door, take extra
care to prevent your fingers etc. from
being caught.
●When closing the back door, make sure
to press it lightly on its outer surface. If
the back door handle is used to fully
close the back door, it may result in
hands or arms being caught.
98
1-3. Opening, closing and locking the doors
NOTICE
■Back door damper stays
The back door is equipped with damper stays that hold the back door in
place.
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause damage to the back door damper stay, resulting
in malfunction.
●Do not attach any foreign objects, such
as stickers, plastic sheets, or adhesives
to the damper stay rod.
●Do not touch the damper stay rod with
gloves or other fabric items.
●Do not attach any accessories other
than genuine Toyota parts to the back
door.
●Do not place your hand on the damper
stay or apply lateral forces to it.
Damper stays
99
1
Before driving
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Front seats
Manual seat (if equipped)
Seat position adjustment
lever
Seatback angle adjustment
lever
Vertical height adjustment
lever (for driver’s side)
100
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Active head restraints
When the occupant’s lower back
presses against the seatback
during a rear-end collision, the
head restraint moves slightly for-
ward and upward to help reduce
the risk of whiplash on the seat
occupant.
Power seat (if equipped for driver’s seat)
Seat position adjustment
switch
Seatback angle adjustment
switch
Seat cushion (front) angle
adjustment switch
Vertical height adjustment
switch
Lumbar support adjustment
switch
101
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
■Active head restraints
Even small forces applied to the seatback may cause the head restraint to
move. Pushing up a locked head restraint forcibly may make the inner struc-
ture of the head restraint appear. This does not indicate a problem.
CAUTION
■Seat adjustment
●To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not
recline the seat more than necessary.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply
restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the
shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of
an accident.
Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpect-
edly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
●After adjusting the seat, make sure that the seat is locked in position.
During
rear-end
collision
Inner
structure
102
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Rear seats
Before folding down the seatbacks
Park the vehicle in a safe place.
Apply the parking brake firmly and shift the shift position to P.
(P. 205)
Adjust the position of the front seat and the angle of the seat-
back. (P. 99)
Depending on the position of the front seat, if the seatback is folded
backward, it may interfere with the operation of the rear seat.
Stow the buckle of the seat belts.
Lower the head restraint of the rear seat. (P. 105)
Vehicles with an armrest: Stow the armrest of the rear seat if it
is pulled out. (P. 371)
This step is not necessary when operating the driver’s side seat only.
The seatbacks can be folded down.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
103
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
Folding down the seatbacks
Fold the seatback down while
pushing the lock release button.
To return the rear seatbacks to
their original positions, lift them
up until they lock.
■Remove the seat belt from the guide
■Returning rear seatbacks
If the seat belt interferes with luggage on
the folded seats, remove the seat belt
from the guide.
Tilt the rear seatback up until it locks,
making sure that you hold the seat belt to
prevent it from getting caught between
the seatback and the inner side of the
vehicle.
If the seat belt is removed from the guide,
make sure the belt pass through the
guide.
104
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
■When folding the seatbacks down
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
●Do not fold the seatbacks down while driving.
●Stop the vehicle on level ground, set the parking brake and shift the shift
position to P.
●Do not allow anyone to sit on a folded seatback or in the luggage compart-
ment while driving.
●Do not allow children to enter the luggage compartment.
■After returning the seatback to the upright position
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
●Check that the seat belts are not twisted or caught in the seatback.
●Make sure that the seatback is securely
locked in position by lightly pushing it
back and forth.
If the seatbacks is not securely locked,
the red marking will be visible on the
seatback lock release button. Make
sure that the red marking is not visible.
105
1
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Before driving
Head restraints
Head restraints are provided for all seats.
Front seats
Up
Pull the head restraints up.
Down
Push and hold the lock release
button when lowering the head
restraint.
Rear center seat
Up
Down
Pull up or push down the head
restraint while pressing the
lock release button.
Foldable type rear outside seats
To fold
Pull the head restraint up while
pressing the lock release but-
ton.
To use
Lift up and push down the
head restraint to the lowest
lock position.
Lock
release
button
Lock
release
button
Lock release button
106
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■Removing the head restraints
Front and rear center seats
Foldable type rear outside seats
Non-foldable type rear outside seats
Pull the head restraint up while pressing
the lock release button.
Lock
release
button
Pull the head restraint up while pressing
the lock release buttons.
Lock release buttons
Pull the head restraint up while pressing
the lock release button.
Lock release button
107
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
■Installing the head restraints
Front and rear center seats
Rear outside seats
■Adjusting the height of the head restraints
■Adjusting the rear center seat head restraint
Always raise the head restraint one level from the stowed position when
using.
Align the head restraint with the installa-
tion holes and push it down to the lock
position.
Press and hold the lock release button
when lowering the head restraint.
Lock
release
button
Align the head restraint with the installa-
tion holes and push it down to the lowest
lock position.
Make sure that the head restraints are
adjusted so that the center of the head
restraint is closest to the top of your ears.
108
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
■Head restraint precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to
do so may result in death or serious injury.
●Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.
●Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.
●After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure
they are locked in position.
●Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
109
1
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Before driving
Seat belts
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driv-
ing the vehicle.
■Correct use of the seat belts
●Extend the shoulder belt so
that it comes fully over the
shoulder, but does not
come into contact with the
neck or slide off the shoul-
der.
●Position the lap belt as low
as possible over the hips.
●Adjust the position of the
seatback. Sit up straight
and well back in the seat.
●Do not twist the seat belt.
■Fastening and releasing the seat belt
To fasten the seat belt, push
the plate into the buckle
until a click sound is heard.
To release the seat belt,
press the release button.
Release button
110
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Seat belt pretensioners (front seats)
The pretensioner helps the seat
belt to quickly restrain the occu-
pant by retracting the seat belt
when the vehicle is subjected to
certain types of severe frontal
collision.
The pretensioner does not acti-
vate in the event of a minor frontal
impact, a side impact, a rear
impact or a vehicle rollover.
■Adjusting the seat belt shoulder anchor height (front seats)
Push the seat belt shoulder
anchor down while pressing
the release button.
Push the seat belt shoulder
anchor up.
Move the height adjuster up
and down as needed until you
hear a click.
111
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
Pre-collision seat belts (front seats of vehicles with pre-collision
system)
If the system determines that a collision is unavoidable, the front seat
belts will retract before the collision. (P. 303)
■Emergency locking retractor (ELR)
The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also
lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to
extend so that you can move around fully.
■Automatic locking retractor (ALR)
When a passenger’s shoulder belt is completely extended and then
retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be
extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly.
To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once
more. (P. 165)
■Child seat belt usage
The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult
size.
●Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child
becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. (P. 160)
●When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s
seat belt, follow the instructions on P. 109 regarding seat belt usage.
■Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated
If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate
for the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent colli-
sions.
112
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■Seat belt extender
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of
sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.
■Wearing a seat belt
●Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.
●Always wear a seat belt properly.
●Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt
for more than one person at once, including children.
●Toyota recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always
use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.
●To achieve a proper seating position, do not recline the seat more than
necessary. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting
up straight and well back in the seats.
●Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.
●Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.
●When using the rear outside seat belts, make sure that the belt pass
through the guide.
If your seat belts cannot be fastened
securely because they are not long
enough, a personalized seat belt
extender is available from your Toyota
dealer free of charge.
113
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■Pregnant women
■People suffering illness
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (P. 109)
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat
belt in the proper way. (P. 109)
Women who are pregnant should position
the lap belt as low as possible over the
hips in the same manner as other occu-
pants. Extend the shoulder belt com-
pletely over the shoulder and position the
belt across the chest. Avoid belt contact
over the rounding of the abdominal area.
If the seat belt is not worn properly, not
only the pregnant woman, but also the
fetus could suffer death or serious injury
as a result of sudden braking or a colli-
sion.
114
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
■When children are in the vehicle
Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes
twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries
that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used
to cut the belt.
■Seat belt pretensioners
●Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger’s seat.
Doing so will disperse the passenger’s weight, which prevents the sensor
from detecting the passenger’s weight properly. As a result, the seat belt
pretensioner for the front passenger’s seat may not activate in the event of
a collision.
●If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In
that case, the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at
your Toyota dealer.
■Adjustable shoulder anchor
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your
shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off
your shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an
accident and cause death or serious injuries in the event of a sudden stop,
sudden swerve or accident. (P. 110)
115
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■Seat belt damage and wear
●Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be
jammed in the door.
●Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose
parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat
belts cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury.
●Ensure that the belt and plate are locked and the belt is not twisted.
If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Toyota
dealer.
●Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been
involved in a serious accident, even if there’s no obvious damage.
●Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the
seat belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Toyota dealer.
Inappropriate handling of the pretensioner may prevent it from operating
properly, resulting in death or serious injury.
116
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
■Using a seat belt extender
●Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without
the extender.
●Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system
because the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increas-
ing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
●The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when
used by another person, or at a different seating position other than the
one originally intended.
NOTICE
■When using a seat belt extender
When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the
extender, not on the seat belt.
This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.
117
1
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Before driving
Steering wheel
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an acci-
dent, resulting in death or serious injury.
■After adjusting the steering wheel
Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.
Otherwise, the steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly causing an
accident, and resulting in death or serious injury.
The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position.
Hold the steering wheel and
push the lever down.
Adjust to the ideal position by
moving the steering wheel
horizontally and vertically.
After adjustment, pull the lever
up to secure the steering
wheel.
STEP
1
STEP
2
118
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Inside rear view mirror
Adjusting the height of rear view mirror
Adjust the height of the rear view
mirror by moving it up and down.
Anti-glare function
Manual anti-glare inside rear view mirror
Reflected light from the headlights of vehicles behind can be reduced
by operating the lever.
Normal position
Anti-glare position
The rear view mirror’s position can be adjusted to enable sufficient
confirmation of the rear view in accordance with the driver’s seating
posture.
ITI14P209
119
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
Auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror (without garage door
opener)
Responding to the level of brightness of the headlights of vehicles
behind, the reflected light is automatically reduced.
Changing automatic anti-glare
function mode
ON/OFF
When the automatic anti-glare
function is in ON mode, the indi-
cator illuminates.
The function will set to ON mode
each time the “POWER” switch is
turned to ON mode.
Pressing the button turns the
function to OFF mode. (The indi-
cator also turns off.)
Auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror (with garage door opener)
Responding to the level of brightness of the headlights of vehicles
behind, the reflected light is automatically reduced.
Changing automatic anti-glare
function mode
ON
OFF
When the automatic anti-glare
function is in ON mode, the indi-
cator illuminates.
The function will set to ON mode
each time the “POWER” switch is
turned to ON mode.
Turns the function to OFF mode,
the indicator turns off.
Indicator
Indicator
120
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■To prevent sensor error (vehicles with auto anti-glare inside rear view
mirror)
Without garage door opener
With garage door opener
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.
Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and cause an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
To ensure that the sensors operate prop-
erly, do not touch or cover them.
121
1
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Before driving
Outside rear view mirrors
Folding the mirrors
Push the mirror back in the direc-
tion of the vehicle’s rear.
Mirror angle can be adjusted using the switch.
To select a mirror to adjust,
press the switch.
Left
Right
To adjust the mirror, press the
switch.
Up
Right
Down
Left
STEP
1
STEP
2
122
1-4. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■Mirror angle can be adjusted when
The “POWER” switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode.
■When the mirrors are fogged up (vehicles with outside rear view mirror
defoggers)
The outside rear view mirrors can be cleared using the mirror defoggers.
Turn on the rear window defogger to turn on the outside rear view mirror
defoggers. (P. 346)
CAUTION
■When driving the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while driving.
Failing to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an acci-
dent, resulting in death or serious injury.
●Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
●Do not drive with the mirrors folded.
●Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly
adjusted before driving.
■When a mirror is moving
To avoid personal injury and mirror malfunction, be careful not to get your
hand caught by the moving mirror.
■When the mirror defoggers are operating (vehicles with outside rear
view mirror defoggers)
Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and
burn you.
123
1
Before driving
1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
Power windows
Window lock switch
Press the switch down to lock
the passenger windows.
Use this switch to prevent chil-
dren from accidentally opening or
closing a passenger window.
Press the switch again to unlock
the passenger windows.
The power windows can be opened and closed using the switches.
Operating the switch moves the windows as follows:
One-touch closing*
Closing
One-touch opening*
Opening
*: Pushing the switch in the
opposite direction will stop win-
dow travel partway.
■The power windows can be operated when
The “POWER” switch is in ON mode.
124
1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
■Operating the power windows after turning the hybrid system off
The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even
after the “POWER” switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off.
They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
■Jam protection function
If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame,
window travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly.
■When the power window does not close normally
If the jam protection function is operating abnormally and a window cannot
be closed, perform the following operations using the power window switch
on the relevant door.
●After stopping the vehicle, the window can be closed by holding the
power window switch in the one-touch closing position while the
“POWER” switch is turned to ON mode.
●If the window still cannot be closed even by carrying out the operation
explained above, initialize the function by performing the following proce-
dure.
Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position.
Continue holding the switch for a further 6 seconds after the win-
dow has closed.
Hold the power window switch in the one-touch opening position.
Continue holding the switch for a further 2 seconds after the win-
dow has opened completely.
Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position
once again. Continue holding the switch for a further 2 seconds
after the window has closed.
If you release the switch while the window is moving, start again from the
beginning.
If the window continues to close but then re-open slightly even after perform-
ing the above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
125
1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
1
Before driving
■Customization
The one-touch closing operation can be disabled, except for the driver’s
seat.
(Customizable features P. 590)
CAUTION
■Closing the windows
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■Jam protection function
●Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection
function.
●The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just
before the window fully closes.
●Check to make sure that all passengers
do not have any part of their body in a
position where it could be caught when
a window is being operated.
●Do not allow children to operate the
power windows.
Closing a power window on someone
can cause serious injury, and in some
instances, even death.
126
1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
Moon roof with Solar Panel
: If equipped
Use the overhead switches to open, close, and tilt the moon roof up
and down.
■Open
Tilt up
Push “OPEN”.
The moon roof will open after
pausing at the tilt up position,
when pushing and holding the
switch.
To tilt down, push and hold
“CLOSE”.
Open
Push “OPEN” at the tilt up
position.
Lightly push on either side of
the switch stops the moon roof
partway.
The moon roof stops slightly
before the fully open position
to reduce the wind noise.
Push “OPEN” again to fully
open.
127
1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
1
Before driving
■The moon roof can be operated when
The “POWER” switch is in ON mode.
■Operating the moon roof after turning the hybrid system OFF
The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the
“POWER” switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned OFF. It cannot,
however, be operated once either front door is opened.
■Close
Push and hold “CLOSE”.
The moon roof stops once.
Push and hold the switch again
to fully close.
128
1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
■Jam protection function
If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while closing
or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly.
■To reduce moon roof wind noise
When the moon roof is opened automatically, it will stop slightly before the
fully open position. Driving with the moon roof in this position can help
reduce wind noise.
■Sunshade
The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade
will open automatically when the moon roof is opened.
■Solar Panel
The solar panel contains solar cells, and produces energy to operate the
Solar Ventilation System by receiving sunlight.
■Moon roof open warning buzzer
The buzzer sounds when the “POWER” switch is turned off and the driver’s
door is opened with the moon roof open.
■If the moon roof cannot be closed
If the moon roof cannot be closed, such as when the jam protection function
activates accidentally due to a malfunction, pressing and holding “CLOSE”
switch closes the moon roof.
After this, to make the automatic opening function and jam protection func-
tion available again, press and hold the “OPEN” switch until the moon roof
opens fully and then closes slightly.
If the functions do not activate, contact your Toyota dealer.
129
1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■Opening the moon roof
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.
●Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehi-
cle while it is moving.
●Do not sit on top of the moon roof.
■Closing the moon roof
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their bod-
ies in a position where they could be caught when the moon roof is being
operated.
●Do not allow children to operate the moon roof.
Closing the moon roof on someone can cause death or serious injury.
■Jam protection function
●Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection
function intentionally.
●The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just
before the moon roof fully closes.
■Precautions for moon roof with Solar Panel
Be careful not to touch the solar panel surface in scorching sun weather con-
ditions as it will rise very high in temperature and may cause burns.
130
1-5. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the moon roof
●Before opening, make sure that there are no foreign objects such as
stones or ice around the opening.
●Do not hit the face or edge of the moon roof with hard objects.
●Do not continue to press and hold the switch after the moon roof has
opened or closed completely.
■Operating the moon roof
There is the possibility that water or rain will get into the vehicle if you oper-
ate the moon roof after a rainfall, snowfall or car wash. Wipe the moon roof
dry with a cloth before operating it.
131
1
Before driving
1-6. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap
Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap:
■Before refueling the vehicle
●Turn the “POWER” switch off and close all the doors and win-
dows.
●Confirm the type of fuel. (P. 132)
■Opening the fuel tank cap
Pull up the opener to open the
fuel filler door.
Turn the fuel tank cap slowly
to open.
Hang the fuel tank cap on the
back of the fuel filler door.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
132
1-6. Refueling
Closing the fuel tank cap
After refueling, turn the fuel tank
cap until you hear a click. Once
the cap is released, it will turn
slightly in the opposite direction.
■Fuel types
Use unleaded gasoline. (Octane rating 87 [Research Octane Number 91] or
higher)
■Gasoline price setting screen
After refueling more than approximately 1.3 gal. (5 L, 1.1 Imp.gal.) L and
turning the “POWER” switch to ON mode, the gasoline price setting screen
will be automatically displayed on the multi-information display. (P. 231)
133
1-6. Refueling
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■When refueling the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do
so may result in death or serious injury.
●After exiting the vehicle and before opening the fuel filler door, touch an
unpainted metal surface to discharge any static electricity. It is important to
discharge static electricity before refueling because sparks resulting from
static electricity can cause fuel vapors to ignite while refueling.
●Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it.
A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened.
Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot
weather, pressurized fuel may spray out of the filler neck and cause injury.
●Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their
body to come close to an open fuel tank.
●Do not inhale vaporized fuel.
Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.
●Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.
Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.
●Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically
charged.
This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition
hazard.
■When refueling
Observe the following precautions to prevent fuel overflowing from the fuel
tank:
●Securely insert the fuel nozzle into the fuel filler neck
●Stop filling the tank after the fuel nozzle automatically clicks off
●Do not top off the fuel tank
■When replacing the fuel tank cap
Do not use anything but a genuine Toyota fuel tank cap designed for your
vehicle. Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in
death or serious injury.
134
1-6. Refueling
NOTICE
■Refueling
Do not spill fuel during refueling.
Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the emission control
system to operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the
vehicle’s painted surface.
135
1
Before driving
1-7. Theft deterrent system
Immobilizer system
■System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type immobilizer system.
■Conditions affecting operation
Depending on the surrounding environment and conditions, the immobilizer
system may not operate properly. This may prevent the hybrid system from
starting. (P. 72)
The vehicle’s keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the
hybrid system from starting if a key has not been previously regis-
tered in the vehicle’s on-board computer.
Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
The indicator light flashes after
the “POWER” switch has been
turned off to indicate that the
system is operating.
The indicator light stops flash-
ing after the “POWER” switch
has been turned to ACCES-
SORY or ON mode to indicate
that the system has been can-
celed.
136
1-7. Theft deterrent system
■Certifications for the immobilizer system
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: NI4TMIMB-1
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
NOTICE
■To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system.
If modified or removed, the proper operation of the system cannot be guar-
anteed.
137
1
1-7. Theft deterrent system
Before driving
Theft prevention labels (for the U.S.A.)
These labels are attached to
the vehicle to reduce vehicle
theft by facilitating the tracing
and recovery of parts from sto-
len vehicles. Do not remove
under penalty of law.
138
1-8. Safety information
Correct driving posture
Drive with a good posture as follows:
Sit upright and well back in
the seat. (P. 99)
Adjust the position of the
seat forward or backward to
ensure the pedals can be
reached and easily
depressed to the extent
required. (P. 99)
Adjust the seatback so that
the controls are easily oper-
able. (P. 99)
Adjust the tilt and telescopic
positions of the steering
wheel downward so the air-
bag is facing your chest.
(P. 117)
Lock the head restraint in
place with the center of the
head restraint closest to the
top of your ears. (P. 105)
Wear the seat belt correctly.
(P. 109)
139
1-8. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■While driving
●Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat.
Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
●Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.
A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce
the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint, increasing the risk of
death or serious injury to the driver or passenger.
●Do not place anything under the front seats.
Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat
tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an acci-
dent, resulting in death or serious injury. The adjustment mechanism may
also be damaged.
■Adjusting the seat position
●Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passen-
gers are not injured by the moving seat.
●Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid
injury.
Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.
140
1-8. Safety information
SRS airbags
The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain
types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the
occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce the
risk of death or serious injury.
SRS front airbags
SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag
Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front pas-
senger from impact with interior components
SRS knee airbag
Can help provide driver protection
141
1-8. Safety information
1
Before driving
SRS side and curtain shield airbags
SRS side airbags
Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants
SRS curtain shield airbags
Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outer
seats
142
1-8. Safety information
SRS airbag system components
Front passenger airbag
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG
OFF” indicator lights
Side airbags
Curtain shield airbags
Front passenger occupant
classification system (ECU
and sensors)
Side impact sensors (rear)
SRS warning light
Driver airbag
Side impact sensors (front)
Seat belt pretensioners and
force limiters
Driver’s seat belt buckle
switch
Driver’s seat position sensor
Driver’s knee airbag
Front passenger’s seat belt
buckle switch
Front impact sensors
Airbag sensor assembly
143
1-8. Safety information
1
Before driving
Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based
on the US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag
sensor assembly (ECU) controls airbag deployment based on infor-
mation obtained from the sensors etc. shown in the system compo-
nents diagram above. This information includes crash severity and
occupant information. As the airbags deploy, a chemical reaction in
the inflators quickly fills the airbags with nontoxic gas to help restrain
the motion of the occupants.
■If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)
●Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying
(inflating) SRS airbag.
●A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.
●Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator)
as well as the front seats, parts of the front and rear pillars, and roof side
rails, may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.
●The windshield may crack.
●For Safety Connect subscribers, if the SRS airbags deploy or in the event
of a severe rear-end collision, the system is designed to send an emer-
gency call to the response center, notifying them of the vehicle’s location
(without needing to push the “SOS” button) and an agent will attempt to
speak with the occupants to ascertain the level of emergency and assis-
tance required. If the occupants are unable to communicate, the agent
automatically treats the call as an emergency and helps to dispatch the
necessary emergency services. (P. 388)
144
1-8. Safety information
■SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS front airbags)
●The SRS front airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds
the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to an approxi-
mately 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h] frontal collision with a fixed wall that
does not move or deform).
However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher in the following
situations:
• If the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole,
which can move or deform on impact
• If the vehicle is involved in an underride collision such as a collision in
which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a
truck
●Depending on the type of collision, it is possible that only the seat belt
pretensioners will activate.
●The SRS front airbags for the front passenger will not activate if there is
no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the SRS front
airbags for the front passenger may deploy if luggage is put in the seat,
even if the seat is unoccupied. (P. 154)
■SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS side and curtain shield air-
bags)
The SRS side and curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of an impact
that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to the
impact force produced by an approximately 3300 lb. [1500 kg] vehicle collid-
ing with the vehicle cabin from a direction perpendicular to the vehicle orien-
tation at an approximate speed of 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h]).
145
1-8. Safety information
1
Before driving
■Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other
than a collision
The SRS front airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the
underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.
■Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS front air-
bags)
The SRS front airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a
side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal
collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward
deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur.
●Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or
hard surface
●Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
●Landing hard or falling
●Collision from the side
●Collision from the rear
●Vehicle rollover
146
1-8. Safety information
■Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags
(SRS side and curtain shield airbags)
The SRS side and curtain shield airbags may not activate if the vehicle is
subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the
side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.
The SRS side and curtain shield airbags do not generally inflate if the vehi-
cle is involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in
a low-speed side collision.
■When to contact your Toyota dealer
In the following cases, the vehicle will require inspection and/or repair. Con-
tact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
●Any of the SRS airbags has been inflated.
●Collision from the side to the vehicle
body other than the passenger com-
partment
●Collision from the side at an angle
●Collision from the front
●Collision from the rear
●Vehicle rollover
●The front of the vehicle is damaged or
deformed, or was involved in an acci-
dent that was not severe enough to
cause the SRS airbags to inflate.
147
1-8. Safety information
1
Before driving
●A portion of a door is damaged or
deformed, or the vehicle was involved
in an accident that was not severe
enough to cause the SRS side and cur-
tain shield airbags to inflate.
●The pad section of the steering wheel,
dashboard near the front passenger air-
bag or lower portion of the driver’s side
instrument panel is scratched, cracked,
or otherwise damaged.
●The surface of the seats with the side
airbag is scratched, cracked, or other-
wise damaged.
●The portion of the front pillars, rear pil-
lars or roof side rail garnishes (padding)
containing the curtain shield airbags
inside is scratched, cracked, or other-
wise damaged.
148
1-8. Safety information
CAUTION
■SRS airbag precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the SRS airbags.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
●The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts
properly.
The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.
●The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause
death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag.
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) advises:
Since the risk zone for the driver’s airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm)
of inflation, placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag pro-
vides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the
center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in.
(250 mm) away now, you can change your driving position in several
ways:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
• Slightly recline the back of the seat.
Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in.
(250 mm) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, sim-
ply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of
your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm,
non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature.
• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the air-
bag toward your chest instead of your head and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still
maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the
instrument panel controls.
149
1-8. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■SRS airbag precautions
●The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and
can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very
close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the air-
bag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits
upright.
●Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or
seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small
to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint sys-
tem. Toyota strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in
the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are
safer for infants and children than the front passenger seat. (P. 160)
●If the seat belt extender has been con-
nected to the front seat belt buckles but
the seat belt extender has not also
been fastened to the latch plate of the
seat belt, the SRS front airbags will
judge that the driver and front passen-
ger are wearing the seat belt even
though the seat belt has not been con-
nected. In this case, the SRS front air-
bags may not activate correctly in a
collision, resulting in death or serious
injury in the event of a collision. Be sure
to wear the seat belt with the seat belt
extender.
150
1-8. Safety information
CAUTION
■SRS airbag precautions
●Do not sit on the edge of the seat or
lean against the dashboard.
●Do not allow a child to stand in front of
the SRS front passenger airbag unit or
sit on the knees of a front passenger.
●Do not allow the front seat occupants to
hold items on their knees.
●Do not lean against the door, the roof
side rail or the front, side and rear pil-
lars.
●Do not allow anyone to kneel on the
passenger seat toward the door or put
their head or hands outside the vehicle.
151
1-8. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■SRS airbag precautions
●Do not hang coat hangers or hard objects on the coat hooks. All of these
items could become projectiles and may cause death or serious injury,
should the SRS curtain shield airbags deploy.
●If a vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbags will deploy,
be sure to remove it.
●Do not attach anything to or lean any-
thing against areas such as the dash-
board, steering wheel pad and lower
portion of the instrument panel.
These items can become projectiles
when the SRS driver, front passenger
and knee airbags deploy.
●Do not attach anything to areas such as
a door, windshield glass, side door
glass, front or rear pillar, roof side rail,
and assist grip.
152
1-8. Safety information
CAUTION
■SRS airbag precautions
●Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side
airbags inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags. Such
accessories may prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, disable
the system or cause the side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in
death or serious injury.
●Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS air-
bag components.
Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.
●Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS air-
bags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.
●If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbags have deployed, open a
door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do
so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.
●If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel
pad and front and rear pillar garnishes, are damaged or cracked, have
them replaced by your Toyota dealer.
●Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger’s seat.
Doing so will disperse the passenger’s weight, which prevents the sensor
from detecting the passenger’s weight properly. As a result, the SRS front
airbags for the front passenger may not deploy in the event of a collision.
153
1-8. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components
Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications
without consulting your Toyota dealer. The SRS airbags may malfunction or
deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death or serious injury.
●Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags
●Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel,
instrument panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear
pillars or roof side rails
●Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the
occupant compartment
●Installation of snow plows, winches, etc. to the front grille (bull bars or kan-
garoo bar etc.)
●Modifications to the vehicle’s suspension system
●Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios and CD
players
●Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability
154
1-8. Safety information
Front passenger occupant classification system
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classifica-
tion system. This system detects the conditions of the front passen-
ger seat and activates or deactivates the devices for the front
passenger.
SRS warning light
“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light
“AIR BAG ON” indicator light
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
155
1-8. Safety information
1
Before driving
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant
classification system
■Adult*1
■Child*3 or child restraint system*4
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
“AIR BAG
ON”
SRS warning light Off
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Flashing*2
Devices
Front passenger airbag
Activated
Side airbag on the front passenger seat
Curtain shield airbag in the front passen-
ger side
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
“AIR BAG
OFF”*5
SRS warning light Off
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Flashing*2
Devices
Front passenger airbag Deactivated
Side airbag on the front passenger seat
Activated
Curtain shield airbag in the front passen-
ger side
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
156
1-8. Safety information
■Unoccupied
■There is a malfunction in the system
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
Not illuminated
SRS warning light Off
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Devices
Front passenger airbag Deactivated
Side airbag on the front passenger seat
Activated
Curtain shield airbag in the front passen-
ger side
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner Deactivated
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
“AIR BAG
OFF”
SRS warning light On
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Off
Devices
Front passenger airbag Deactivated
Side airbag on the front passenger seat
Activated
Curtain shield airbag in the front passen-
ger side
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
157
1-8. Safety information
1
Before driving
*1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a
smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may rec-
ognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and pos-
ture.
*2: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.
*3: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system
sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/
her as an adult depending on his/her physique or posture.
*4: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front pas-
senger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only
be installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable.
(P. 160)
*5: In case the indicator light is not illuminated, consult this manual
on how to install the child restraint system properly. (P. 165)
158
1-8. Safety information
CAUTION
■Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding front passenger occupant clas-
sification system.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
●Wear the seat belt properly.
●Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt plate has not been left inserted
into the buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.
●Make sure the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is not illuminated when using
the seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat
belt buckle, and reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender
after making sure the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If you
use the seat belt extender while the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illumi-
nated, the SRS airbags for the passenger may not activate correctly,
which could cause death or serious injury in the event of a collision.
●Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment (e.g.
seatback pocket).
●Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or
feet on the front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat.
●Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or
press on the seatback with their legs.
●Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.
159
1-8. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
●Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear
seat. This may cause the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light to be illuminated,
which indicates that the passenger’s airbags will not deploy in the event of
a severe accident. If the seatback touches the rear seat, return the seat-
back to a position where it does not touch the rear seat. Keep the front
passenger seatback as upright as possible when the vehicle is moving.
Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the effectiveness of the
seat belt system.
●If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the “AIR BAG ON” indicator
light is illuminated. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask the
passenger to sit up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and
with the seat belt worn correctly. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator still
remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or
if that is not possible, move the front passenger seat fully rearward.
●When it is unavoidable to install a forward-facing child restraint system on
the front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front pas-
senger seat in the proper order. (P. 165)
●Do not modify or remove the front seats.
●Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Other-
wise, the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the
detection system. In this case, contact your Toyota dealer immediately.
●Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the
front seatbacks.
●Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion and seat cover, that cov-
ers the seat cushion surface.
●Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.
160
1-8. Safety information
Child restraint systems
Points to remember
Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is
much safer than installing one to the front passenger seat.
●Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is
appropriate to the age and size of the child.
●For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the
child restraint system.
General installation instructions are provided in this manual.
(P. 165)
A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be prop-
erly restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder
belt.
The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require the
use of child restraint systems.
161
1-8. Safety information
1
Before driving
Types of child restraints
Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types
according to the age and size of the child.
Rear facing Infant seat/convertible seat
Forward facing Convertible seat
Booster seat
162
1-8. Safety information
■When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat
■Selecting an appropriate child restraint system
●Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child
becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
●If the child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear
seat and use the vehicle’s seat belt. (P. 109)
CAUTION
■Child restraint precautions
●For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child
must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system
depending on the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is
not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be
crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle’s interior.
●Toyota strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that con-
forms to the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to acci-
dent statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat
than in the front seat.
When you have to use a child restraint
system on the front passenger seat,
adjust the following:
●The seatback to the most upright posi-
tion
●The seat cushion to the fully rearward
position
163
1-8. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■Child restraint precautions
●Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger
seat even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated. In the event
of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag
can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child
restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.
●A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front pas-
senger seat only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that
requires a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat
since there is no top tether strap anchor for the front passenger seat.
Adjust the seatback as upright as possible and always move the seat as
far back as possible even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illumi-
nated, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable
speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.
●Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system
on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system
with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not
securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or seri-
ous injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden stop,
sudden swerve or accident.
●Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body
against the door or the area of the seat, front and rear pillars or roof side
rails from which the SRS side airbags or SRS curtain shield airbags deploy
even if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if
the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact
could cause death or serious injury to the child.
●Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by
the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If
it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child
in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
164
1-8. Safety information
CAUTION
■When children are in the vehicle
Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes
twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries
that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used
to cut the belt.
■When the child restraint system is not in use
●Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is
not in use. Do not store the child restraint system unsecured in the pas-
senger compartment.
●If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the
vehicle or store it securely in the luggage compartment. This will prevent it
from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or
accident.
165
1
1-8. Safety information
Before driving
Installing child restraints
Follow the child restraint system manufacturer’s instructions. Firmly
secure child restraints to the seats using the LATCH anchors or a
seat belt. Attach the top tether strap when installing a child restraint.
The lap/shoulder belt can be used if your child restraint system is
not compatible with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chil-
dren) system.
Child restraint LATCH anchors
LATCH anchors are provided
for the outer rear seats. (But-
tons displaying the location of
the anchors are attached to
the seats.)
Seat belts equipped with a
child restraint locking mecha-
nism (ALR/ELR belts except
driver’s seat belt) (P. 109)
Anchor brackets (for top tether
strap)
An anchor bracket is provided
for each rear seat.
166
1-8. Safety information
Installation with LATCH system
Widen the gap between the seat cushion and seatback
slightly.
Type A
Latch the hooks of the lower
straps onto the LATCH anchors.
If the child restraint has a top
tether strap, the top tether strap
should be latched onto the top
tether strap anchor.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint
system indicates the presence of
a lower connector system.
STEP
1
Canada only
STEP
2
167
1-8. Safety information
1
Before driving
Type B
Latch the buckles onto the
LATCH anchors. If the child
restraint has a top tether strap,
the top tether strap should be
latched onto the top tether strap
anchor.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint
system indicates the presence of
a lower connector system.
Canada only
STEP
2
168
1-8. Safety information
Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock
function belt)
■Rear facing Infant seat/convertible seat
Place the child restraint system
on the rear seat facing the rear
of the vehicle.
Run the seat belt through the
child restraint system and insert
the plate into the buckle. Make
sure that the belt is not twisted.
Fully extend the shoulder belt
and then allow it to retract
slightly in order to activate the
ALR lock mode.
Lock mode allows the seat belt to
retract only.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
169
1-8. Safety information
1
Before driving
While pushing the child restraint
system down into the rear seat,
allow the shoulder belt to retract
until the child restraint system is
securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.
■Forward-facing Convertible seat
Place the child restraint system
on the seat facing the front of the
vehicle.
Run the seat belt through the
child restraint system and insert
the plate into the buckle. Make
sure that the belt is not twisted.
STEP
4
STEP
1
STEP
2
170
1-8. Safety information
Fully extend the shoulder belt
and then allow it to retract
slightly in order to activate the
ALR lock mode.
Lock mode allows the seat belt to
retract only.
While pushing the child restraint
system into the rear seat, allow
the shoulder belt to retract until
the child restraint system is
securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.
If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap
should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor. (P. 172)
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
171
1-8. Safety information
1
Before driving
■Booster seat
Place the child restraint system
on the seat facing the front of the
vehicle.
Sit the child in the child restraint
system. Fit the seat belt to the
child restraint system according
to the manufacturer’s instruc-
tions and insert the plate into the
buckle. Make sure that the belt is
not twisted.
Check that the shoulder belt is
correctly positioned over the
child’s shoulder and that the lap
belt is as low as possible.
(P. 109)
STEP
1
STEP
2
172
1-8. Safety information
Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt
Press the buckle release button
and fully retract the seat belt.
Child restraint systems with a top tether strap
Secure the child restraint system using a seat belt or the
LATCH anchors, and do the following.
Foldable type outside seats
Adjust the head restraint to the
upmost position.
STEP
1
173
1-8. Safety information
1
Before driving
Non-foldable type outside seats
Remove the head restraint.
Center seat
Adjust the head restraint to the
upmost position.
174
1-8. Safety information
Open the anchor bracket cover,
latch the hook onto the anchor
bracket and tighten the top tether
strap.
Make sure the top tether strap is
securely latched.
Outside only: Do the following.
Foldable type
Adjust the head restraint to the
downmost position.
Non-foldable type
Install the head restraint.
STEP
2
STEP
3
175
1-8. Safety information
1
Before driving
■Laws and regulations pertaining to anchors
The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.
Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifica-
tions can be used.
This vehicle is designed to conform to the SAE J1819.
CAUTION
■When installing a booster seat
To prevent the belt from going into ALR lock mode, do not fully extend the
shoulder belt. ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only. This could cause
injury or discomfort to the child. (P. 111)
■When installing a child restraint system
Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual
and fix the child restraint system securely in place.
If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other
passengers may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of sudden
braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
●If the driver’s seat interferes with the
child restraint system and prevents it
from being attached correctly, attach
the child restraint system to the right-
hand rear seat.
●Adjust the front passenger seat so that
it does not interfere with the child
restraint system.
176
1-8. Safety information
CAUTION
■When installing a child restraint system
●When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is
positioned across the center of the child’s shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from the child’s neck, but not so that it could fall off the child’s
shoulder. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury in the event
of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
●Ensure that the belt and plate are securely locked and the seat belt is not
twisted.
●Shake the child restraint system left and right, and forward and backward
to ensure that it has been securely installed.
●After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.
●Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system
manufacturer.
●Only put a forward-facing child restraint
system on the front seat when unavoid-
able.
When installing a forward-facing child
restraint system on the front passenger
seat, move the seat as far back as pos-
sible even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indica-
tor light is illuminated. Failure to do so
may result in death or serious injury if
the airbags deploy (inflate).
177
1-8. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■Do not use a seat belt extender
If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the
seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause
death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of sud-
den braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
■To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors
When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects
around the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child
restraint system. Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached,
or it may cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the
event of a sudden braking, sudden swerve or accident.
178
1-8. Safety information
When driving 2
179
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle............ 180
Power (ignition) switch..... 192
EV drive mode ................. 199
Hybrid transmission ......... 202
Turn signal lever .............. 211
Parking brake................... 212
Horn ................................. 213
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters ......... 214
Indicators and warning
lights .............................. 219
Multi-information
display............................ 223
Head-up display............... 243
2-3. Operating the lights and
windshield wipers
Headlight switch............... 250
Fog light switch ................ 256
Windshield wipers and
washer ........................... 258
Rear window wiper and
washer ........................... 262
Headlight cleaner
switch............................. 265
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control................... 266
Dynamic radar cruise
control ............................ 270
LKA (Lane-Keeping
Assist) ............................ 286
Driving assist systems ..... 296
Hill-start assist control...... 301
PCS (Pre-Collision
System).......................... 303
2-5. Driving information
Cargo and luggage .......... 311
Vehicle load limits ............ 316
Winter driving tips ............ 317
Trailer towing ................... 322
Dinghy towing .................. 323
180
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle
The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driv-
ing:
■Starting the hybrid system
P. 192
■Driving
With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift position to D.
(P. 202)
Check that the shift position indicator shows D. (P. 214)
Release the parking brake. (P. 212)
Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the
accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
■Stopping
With the shift position in D, depress the brake pedal.
If necessary, set the parking brake.
When the vehicle will be stopped for an extended period of time,
shift the shift position to P. (P. 205)
■Parking the vehicle
Stop the vehicle completely.
Set the parking brake. (P. 212)
Shift the shift position to P. (P. 205)
Check that the shift position indicator shows P. (P. 202)
Press the “POWER” switch to stop the hybrid system.
Slowly release the brake pedal.
Lock the door, making sure that you have the electronic key
on your person.
When parking on a hill, block the wheels as needed.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
6
181
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Starting off on a uphill
Firmly set the parking brake with the brake pedal depressed,
and then shift the shift position to D.
Release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator
pedal.
Release the parking brake.
■When starting off on a uphill
The hill-start assist control is available. (P. 301)
■Driving in the rain
●Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the
windows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.
●Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be
especially slippery.
●Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain,
because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road
surface, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly.
■Breaking in your new Toyota
To extend the life of the vehicle, observing the following precautions is rec-
ommended:
●For the first 200 miles (300 km):
Avoid sudden stops.
●For the first 600 miles (1000 km):
• Do not drive at extremely high speeds.
• Avoid sudden acceleration.
• Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
182
2-1. Driving procedures
■Operating your vehicle in a foreign country
Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability
of the correct fuel. (P. 562)
■For efficient use
●Shift the shift position to D when driving.
In the N position, the gasoline engine operates but electricity cannot be
generated. The hybrid battery (traction battery) will discharge, requiring
unnecessary engine power to recharge.
●Drive your vehicle smoothly.
Avoid abrupt acceleration and deceleration. Gradual acceleration and
deceleration will make more effective use of the electric motor (traction
motor) without having to use gasoline engine power.
●Avoid repeated acceleration.
Repeated acceleration consumes hybrid battery (traction battery) power,
resulting in poor acceleration. Battery power can be restored by driving
with the accelerator pedal slightly released.
●Shift the shift position to P when parking.
In the N position, the hybrid battery (traction battery) does not recharge.
Leaving the shift position in the N position for an extended period of time
may discharge the hybrid battery (traction battery). The vehicle cannot
run if the hybrid battery (traction battery) is discharged.
183
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
CAUTION
■When starting the vehicle
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the hybrid sys-
tem operating. This prevents the vehicle from creeping.
■When driving the vehicle
●Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accel-
erator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.
• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake
pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident
that could result in death or serious injury.
• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a diffi-
culty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.
• Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the
vehicle only slightly. This allows you to depress the brake and acceler-
ator pedals properly.
• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake
pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, result-
ing in an accident.
●Because there is no engine noise when the vehicle is being driven using
the electric motor, pedestrians in the vicinity may not notice the vehicle.
Even though the vehicle is equipped with the vehicle proximity notification
system, drive with care as pedestrians in the vicinity may still not notice
the vehicle if the surrounding area is noisy.
●Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.
The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. These hot
parts may cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.
●Do not let the vehicle roll backward while a forward driving position is
selected, or roll forward while the shift position is in R.
Doing so may result in an accident or damage to the vehicle.
184
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
●If the smell of exhaust is noticed inside the vehicle, open the windows and
check that the back door is closed. Large amounts of exhaust in the vehi-
cle can cause driver drowsiness and an accident, resulting in death or a
serious health hazard. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately.
●Do not shift the shift position to P while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle
control.
●Do not shift the shift position to R while the vehicle is moving forward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle
control.
●Do not shift the shift position to D while the vehicle is moving backward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle
control.
●Moving the shift position to N while the vehicle is moving will disengage
the hybrid system. Engine braking is not available with the hybrid system
disengaged.
●During normal driving, do not turn off the hybrid system. Turning the hybrid
system off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control,
but the power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more
difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so.
However, in the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible
to stop the vehicle in the normal way: P. 556
●Use engine braking (shift position B instead of shift position D) to maintain
a safe speed when driving down a steep hill.
Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose
effectiveness. (P. 202)
185
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
CAUTION
●Do not adjust the positions of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or
outside rear view mirrors while driving.
Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control that can cause accidents,
resulting in death or serious injury.
●Always check that all passengers’ arms, heads or other parts of their body
are not outside the vehicle, as this may result in death or serious injury.
●Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit per-
mits it, do not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has high-
speed capability tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire
failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer
to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are high-speed capability
tires or not before driving at such speeds.
■When driving on slippery road surfaces
●Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and
reduce your ability to control the vehicle, resulting in an accident.
●Sudden acceleration, engine braking due to shift changing, or changes in
engine speed could cause the vehicle to skid, resulting in an accident.
●After driving through a puddle, depress the brake pedal to make sure that
the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the
brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet
and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected, resulting in
an accident.
186
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■When changing the shift position
Be careful not to change the shift position with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
Changing the shift position to any positions other than P or N may cause the
vehicle to accelerate abruptly, causing an accident and resulting in death or
serious injury.
After changing the shift position, make sure to confirm the current shift posi-
tion displayed on the shift position indicator inside the meter.
■If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indica-
tors)
Have your Toyota dealer check and replace the brake pads as soon as pos-
sible.
Rotor damage may result if the pads are not replaced when needed.
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads
and/or those of the brake discs are exceeded.
■When the vehicle is stopped
●Do not depress the accelerator pedal unnecessarily.
If the vehicle is in any shift position other than P or N, the vehicle may
accelerate suddenly and unexpectedly, causing an accident.
●Do not leave the vehicle with the hybrid system on for a long time.
If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space
and check that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.
●In order to prevent accidents due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep
depressing the brake pedal while the “READY” indicator is on. Apply the
parking brake as necessary.
187
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
CAUTION
●If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused
by the vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal
and securely apply the parking brake as needed.
●Avoid revving or racing the engine.
Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause
the exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible
material is nearby.
■When the vehicle is parked
●Make sure to firmly apply the parking brake and shift the shift position to P.
Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move, or the vehicle to acceler-
ate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed. Also, when
leaving the vehicle, make sure to turn off the hybrid system and lock the
vehicle.
Sound or shuddering may not be noticed even when the hybrid vehicle is
ready to drive (when the “READY” indicator is illuminated).
●Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in
the vehicle when it is in the sun.
Doing so may result in the following:
• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a
fire.
• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and
plastic material of glasses to deform or crack.
• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the
interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehi-
cle’s electrical components.
188
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
●Do not leave cigarette lighters in the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter is in a
place such as the glove box or on the floor, it may be lit accidentally when
luggage is loaded or the seat is adjusted, causing a fire.
●Do not attach adhesive discs to the windshield or windows. Do not place
containers such as air fresheners on the instrument panel or dashboard.
Adhesive discs or containers may act as lenses, causing a fire in the vehi-
cle.
●Do not leave a door or window open if the curved glass is coated with a
metallized film such as a silver-colored one. Reflected sunlight may cause
the glass to act as a lens, causing a fire.
●Do not touch the exhaust pipe while the hybrid system is operating or
immediately after turning the hybrid system off.
Doing so may cause burns.
●Do not leave the hybrid system operating in an area with snow build-up, or
where it is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the
hybrid system is operating, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehi-
cle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
■Exhaust gases
Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless
and odorless. Inhaling exhaust gases may lead to death or a serious health
hazard.
●If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area, stop the hybrid system. In a
closed area, such as a garage, exhaust gases may collect and enter the
vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
●The exhaust system should be checked occasionally. If there is a hole or
crack caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise,
be sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Toyota dealer.
Failure to do so may allow exhaust gases to enter the vehicle, resulting in
death or a serious health hazard.
189
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
CAUTION
■When taking a nap in the vehicle
Always turn the hybrid system off. Otherwise, if you accidentally move the
shift lever or depress the accelerator pedal, this could cause an accident or
fire due to hybrid system overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in
a poorly ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle,
leading to death or a serious health hazard.
■When braking
●When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.
Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and this may cause
one side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also, the
parking brake may not securely hold the vehicle.
●If the electronically controlled assist function does not operate, do not fol-
low other vehicles closely and avoid downhill or sharp turns that require
braking.
In this case, braking is still possible, but the brake pedal should be
depressed more firmly than usual. Also, the braking distance will increase.
●The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems; if one of the
systems fails, the others will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal
should be depressed more firmly than usual and the braking distance will
increase. If this happens, do not continue to drive the vehicle. If the brake
system warning light (red indicator) comes on while driving, immediately
stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.
190
2-1. Driving procedures
NOTICE
■When driving the vehicle
●Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during
driving, as this may restrain driving torque.
●Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake
pedals at the same time to hold the vehicle on a hill.
■Avoiding damage to vehicle parts
●Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for
an extended period of time.
Doing so may damage the power steering motor.
●When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid
damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.
■If you get a flat tire while driving
A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and gradually depress the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.
●It may be difficult to control your vehicle.
●The vehicle will make abnormal sounds or vibrations.
●The vehicle will lean abnormally.
Information on what to do in case of a flat tire. (P. 523)
191
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
NOTICE
■When encountering flooded roads
Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may
cause the following serious damage to the vehicle:
●Engine stalling
●Short in electrical components
●Engine damage caused by water immersion
In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be
sure to have your Toyota dealer check the following:
●Brake function
●Changes in quantity and quality of engine oil, transmission fluid for the
hybrid system, etc.
●Lubricant condition for the bearings and suspension joints (where possi-
ble), and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.
If the P position control system is damaged by flooding, it may not be possi-
ble to shift the shift position to P, or from P to other positions. When the shift
position cannot be changed from P to any other position, the front wheels
will lock, and you will be unable to tow the vehicle with the front wheels on
the ground, as the front wheels may be locked. In this case, transport the
vehicle with both front wheels or all four wheels lifted.
192
2-1. Driving procedures
Power (ignition) switch
Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic
key on your person starts the hybrid system or changes “POWER”
switch modes.
■Starting the hybrid system
Check that the parking brake is set.
Firmly depress the brake pedal.
Check that the “POWER” switch indicator turns green. If the indi-
cator does not turn green, the hybrid system cannot be started.
When the shift position is N, the hybrid system cannot start. Shift
the shift position to P when starting the hybrid system. (P. 205)
Press the “POWER” switch.
The hybrid system can be
started from any “POWER”
switch mode.
Continue depressing the brake
pedal until the hybrid system is
completely started.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
193
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Check that the “READY” indicator is on.
If the “READY” indicator changes from a flashing light to a solid
light and the buzzer sounds, the hybrid system is starting nor-
mally.
The vehicle will not move when the “READY” indicator is off.
The vehicle can move when the “READY” indicator is on even if
the engine is stopped. (The gasoline engine starts or stops auto-
matically in accordance with the state of the vehicle.)
■Stopping the hybrid system
Stop the vehicle completely.
Set the parking brake. (P. 212)
Shift the shift position to P.
(P. 205)
Check that the shift position
indicator shows P. (P. 202)
Press the “POWER” switch.
The hybrid system will stop.
Slowly release the brake pedal and check that the indicator
on the “POWER” switch is off.
STEP
4
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
194
2-1. Driving procedures
■Changing “POWER” switch modes
Modes can be changed by pressing the “POWER” switch with the
brake pedal released. (The mode changes each time the switch is
pressed.)
Off
The emergency flashers can
be used.
ACCESSORY mode
Some electrical components
such as the audio system can
be used.
The “POWER” switch indicator
turns amber.
ON mode
All electrical components can
be used.
The “POWER” switch indicator
turns amber.
195
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
■Auto power off function
If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY or ON mode (the hybrid system is not
operating) for more than an hour with the shift position in P, the “POWER”
switch will automatically turn off. However, this function cannot entirely pre-
vent the 12-volt battery from discharging. Do not leave the vehicle with the
“POWER” switch in ACCESSORY or ON mode for long periods of time when
the hybrid system is not operating.
■Sounds and vibrations specific to a hybrid vehicle
P. 34
■Electronic key battery depletion
P. 76
■When the ambient temperature is low, such as during winter driving
conditions
The “READY” indicator may flash for a long time when the hybrid system is
starting. Driving will become possible once the “READY” indicator has illumi-
nated. Wait until the “READY” indicator has illuminated.
■Conditions affecting operation
P. 72
■Notes for the entry function
P. 73
■If the hybrid system does not start
The immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 135)
Contact your Toyota dealer.
196
2-1. Driving procedures
■When the “POWER” switch indicator flashes in amber
The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer immediately.
■If the “READY” indicator does not come on
If the “READY” indicator does not come on when you press the “POWER”
switch with the shift position in P and the brake pedal depressed, contact
your Toyota dealer immediately.
■If the hybrid system is malfunctioning
P. 495
■If the electronic key battery is depleted
P. 454
■Operation of the “POWER” switch
●When operating the “POWER” switch, one short, firm press is enough. If
the switch is pressed improperly, the hybrid system may not start or the
“POWER” switch mode may not change. It is not necessary to press and
hold the switch.
●If attempting to restart the hybrid system immediately after turning the
“POWER” switch off, the hybrid system may not start in some cases.
After turning the “POWER” switch off, please wait a few seconds before
restarting the hybrid system.
■Automatically P position selection function
P. 207
197
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
■When the P position control system malfunctions
The “POWER” switch will not be able to be turned off. In such a case, the
switch can be turned off after applying the parking brake.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
■Ending display
When the “POWER” switch is turned off, each of the following will be dis-
played on the multi-information display, and will extinguish after approxi-
mately 30 seconds.
●The driving distance, driving time, consumption and eco savings since
the hybrid system was started.
●The odometer/trip meter
●The clock
CAUTION
■When starting the hybrid system
Always start the hybrid system while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not
depress the accelerator pedal while starting the hybrid system under any cir-
cumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■Stopping the hybrid system in an emergency
If you want to stop the hybrid system in an emergency while driving the vehi-
cle, press and hold the “POWER” switch for more than 3 seconds, or press it
briefly 3 times or more in succession. (P. 556)
However, do not touch the “POWER” switch while driving except in an emer-
gency. Turning the hybrid system off while driving will not cause loss of
steering or braking control, but the power assist to these systems will be lost.
This will make it more difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull over
and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
198
2-1. Driving procedures
NOTICE
■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
●Do not leave the “POWER” switch in ACCESSORY or ON mode for long
periods of time without the hybrid system on.
●If the hybrid system is off, but the indicator on the “POWER” switch is illu-
minated, this indicates that the “POWER” switch is still turned on. When
exiting the vehicle, always check that the “POWER” switch is off.
■Symptoms indicating a malfunction with the “POWER” switch
If the “POWER” switch seems to be operating somewhat differently than
usual, such as the switch sticking slightly, there may be a malfunction. Con-
tact your Toyota dealer immediately.
199
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
EV drive mode
In EV drive mode, the electric motor (traction motor), powered by the
hybrid battery (traction battery), is used to drive the vehicle.
This mode allows you to drive in residential areas late at night, or in
indoor parking lots etc. without concern for noises and exhaust gas
emissions.
Turns EV drive mode on/off
When EV drive mode is turned
on, the EV drive mode indica-
tor will come on.
Pressing the switch when in
EV drive mode will return the
vehicle to normal driving (using
the gasoline engine and elec-
tric motor [traction motor]).
200
2-1. Driving procedures
■Situations in which EV drive mode cannot be turned on
It may not be possible to turn EV drive mode on in the following situations.*
If it cannot be turned on, a buzzer will sound and a message will be shown
on the multi-information display.
●The temperature of the hybrid system is high.
The vehicle has been left in the sun, driven on a hill, driven at high
speeds, etc.
●The temperature of the hybrid system is low.
The vehicle has been left in temperatures lower than about 32 F (0 C)
for a long period of time etc.
●The gasoline engine is warming up.
●The hybrid battery (traction battery) is low.
When the amount of remaining hybrid battery (traction battery) charge
displayed on the meter is low. (P. 42)
●Vehicle speed is high.
●The accelerator pedal is depressed firmly or the vehicle is on a hill etc.
●The windshield defogger is in use.
*: Depending on the circumstances, EV drive mode may also not be
switched to in situations other than those above.
■Switching to EV drive mode when the gasoline engine is cold
If the hybrid system is started while the gasoline engine is cold, the gasoline
engine will start automatically after a short period of time in order to warm
up. In this case, you will become unable to switch to EV drive mode.
After the hybrid system has started and the “READY” indicator has illumi-
nated, press the EV drive mode switch before the gasoline engine starts to
switch to EV drive mode.
201
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
■Automatic cancelation of EV drive mode
When driving in EV drive mode, the gasoline engine may automatically
restart in the following situations. When EV drive mode is canceled, a buzzer
will sound and the EV drive mode indicator will flash and go off.
●The hybrid battery (traction battery) becomes low.
●Vehicle speed becomes high.
●The accelerator pedal is depressed firmly or the vehicle is on a hill etc.
■Possible driving distance when driving in EV drive mode
In EV drive mode, it is possible to drive up to about 1.3 mile (2 km) if driving
at a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or less. (The distance that is possible
depends on the hybrid battery [traction battery] level and driving conditions.)
■Changing a driving mode when in EV drive mode
EV drive mode can be used in conjunction with Eco drive mode and power
mode.
However, EV drive mode may be automatically canceled when used in con-
junction with power mode.
■Fuel economy
PRIUS is designed to achieve the best possible fuel economy during normal
driving (using the gasoline engine and electric motor [traction motor]). Driv-
ing in EV drive mode more than necessary may lower fuel economy.
CAUTION
■While driving
When driving in EV drive mode, pay special attention to the area around the
vehicle. Because there is no engine noise, pedestrians, people riding bicy-
cles or other people and vehicles in the area may not be aware of the vehicle
starting off or approaching them, so take extra care while driving.
202
2-1. Driving procedures
Hybrid transmission
Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions.
■Shifting the shift lever
Shift lever
Operate the shift lever gently and ensure correct shifting operation.
When shifting to the D or R positions, move the shift lever
along the shift gate.
To shift to the N position, slide the shift lever to the left and hold
it. The shift position will change to N.
Shifting to B is only possible when shift position D is selected.
The shift lever will always return to this original position after a
shifting operation.
When shifting from P to N, D or R, from D to R, or from R to D, ensure
that the brake pedal is being depressed and the vehicle is stationary.
203
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Shift position indicator
The position of the frame on the shift position indicator changes in
accordance with the current shift position.
When any shift position other than D or B is selected, the arrow toward
B and B position indicator disappear from the shift position indicator.
When selecting the shift position, make sure that the shift position has
been changed to the desired position by checking the shift position indica-
tor provided on the instrument cluster.
■Shift position purpose
*: For good fuel economy and noise reduction, the D position should usu-
ally be used.
Shift position Function
PParking the vehicle/starting the hybrid system
RReversing
NNeutral
DNormal driving*
BApplying moderate engine braking when driving
down hills or on steep slopes
204
2-1. Driving procedures
■Selecting a driving mode
The following modes can be selected to suit driving conditions:
Eco drive mode
Suitable for improving the fuel economy, because the torque corre-
sponding to the accelerator pedal depression amount can be gener-
ated more smoothly than it is in normal conditions and the operation of
the air conditioning system (heating/cooling) will be minimized.
When the “ECO MODE” switch is pressed, the “ECO MODE” indicator
comes on.
Power mode
Use when high levels of response and feeling are desirable, such as
when driving in mountainous regions or when overtaking.
When the power mode switch is pressed, the power mode indicator
comes on.
205
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
P position switch
■When shifting the shift position to P
Fully stop the vehicle and set the
parking brake, and then press
the P position switch.
When the shift position is
changed to P, the indicator comes
on.
Check that the P position is illumi-
nated on the shift position indica-
tor.
■Shifting the shift position from P to other positions
●While depressing the brake pedal firmly, operate the shift lever.
If the shift lever is operated without depressing the brake pedal,
the buzzer will sound and the shifting operation will be disabled.
●When selecting the shift position, make sure that the shift posi-
tion has been changed to the desired position by checking the
shift position indicator provided on the instrument cluster.
●The shift position cannot be changed from P to B directly.
206
2-1. Driving procedures
■Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode
Eco drive mode controls the heating/cooling operations and fan speed of the
air conditioning system to enhance fuel efficiency. (P. 204) To improve air
conditioning performance, adjust the fan speed or turn off Eco drive mode.
■For the shift positions
●When the “POWER” switch is off, the shift position cannot be changed.
●When the “POWER” switch is in ON mode (the hybrid system is not oper-
ating), the shift position can only be changed to N. The shift position will
be changed to N even if the shift lever is shifted to D or R and held in that
position.
●When the “READY” indicator is on, the shift position can be changed
from P to D, N or R.
●When the “READY” indicator is flashing, the shift position cannot be
changed from P to another position even if the shift lever is operated.
Wait until the “READY” indicator changes from a flashing to a solid light,
and then operate the shift lever again.
●The shift position can only be changed to B directly from D.
In addition, if an attempt is made to change the shift position by moving the
shift lever in any of the following situations, the buzzer will sound and the
shifting operation will be disabled or the shift position will automatically
change to N. When this happens, select an appropriate shift position.
●Situations where the shifting operation will be disabled:
• When an attempt is made to change the shift position from P to another
position by moving the shift lever without depressing the brake pedal.
• When an attempt is made to change the shift position from P or N to B
by moving the shift lever.
207
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
●Situations where the shift position will automatically change to N:
• When the P position switch is pressed while the vehicle is running.*1
• When an attempt is made to select the R position by moving the shift
lever when the vehicle is moving forward.*2
• When an attempt is made to select the D position by moving the shift
lever when the vehicle is moving in reverse.*3
• When an attempt is made to change the shift position from R to B by
moving the shift lever.
*1: Shift position may be changed to P when driving at extremely low
speeds.
*2: Shift position may be changed to R when driving at low speeds.
*3: Shift position may be changed to D when driving at low speeds.
■Reverse warning buzzer
When shifting into R, a buzzer will sound to inform the driver that the shift
position is in R.
■Automatically P position selection function
When the shift position is in a position other than P, pressing the “POWER”
switch with the vehicle stopped completely will cause the shift position to
change to P automatically, and then the “POWER” switch will turn off.
■If the shift position cannot be shifted from P
There is a possibility that the 12-volt battery is discharged. Check the 12-volt
battery in this situation. (P. 543)
208
2-1. Driving procedures
■About engine braking
When shift position B is selected, releasing the accelerator pedal will apply
engine braking.
●When the vehicle is driven at high speeds, compared to ordinary gaso-
line-fueled vehicles, the engine braking deceleration is felt less than that
of other vehicles.
●The vehicle can be accelerated even when shift position B is selected.
If the vehicle is driven continuously in the B position, fuel efficiency will
become low. Usually, shift the shift position to D.
■When driving with cruise control or radar cruise control activated
Even if switching the driving mode to power mode with the intent of enabling
engine braking, engine braking will not activate because cruise control or
radar cruise control will not be canceled.
■When canceling Eco drive mode/power mode
●Press the switch again. Also, power mode will be canceled automatically
when the “POWER” switch is turned off. However, Eco drive mode will
not be canceled automatically until the switch is pressed, even if the
“POWER” switch is turned off.
●When in Eco drive mode, if the power mode switch is pressed or the
operation is reversed, the mode will switch to that of the last switch to be
pressed.
■Switching the drive mode when in EV drive mode
P. 201
■After recharging/reconnecting the 12-volt battery
P. 433
209
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
■Customization
Settings (e.g. Reverse warning buzzer) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 590)
CAUTION
■When driving on slippery road surfaces
Do not accelerate or shift the shift position suddenly.
Sudden changes in engine braking may cause the vehicle to spin or skid,
resulting in an accident.
■For the shift lever
Do not remove the shift lever knob or use anything but a genuine Toyota shift
lever knob. Also, do not hang anything on the shift lever.
Doing so could prevent the shift lever from returning to position, causing
unexpected accidents to occur when the vehicle is in motion.
■P position switch
Do not press the P position switch while the vehicle is moving.
If the P position switch is pressed when driving at very low speeds (for
example, directly before stopping the vehicle), the vehicle may stop sud-
denly when the shift position switches to P, which could lead to an accident.
210
2-1. Driving procedures
NOTICE
■Hybrid battery (traction battery) charge
If the shift position is in N, the hybrid battery (traction battery) will not be
charged. To help prevent the battery from discharging, avoid leaving the N
position selected for an extended period of time.
■Situations where P position control system malfunctions are possible
If any of the following situations occurs, P position control system malfunc-
tions are possible.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place on level ground, apply the park-
ing brake, and then contact your Toyota dealer.
●When the “P LOCK MALFUNCTION” warning message appears on the
multi-information display. (P. 509)
●When the shift position indicator remains off.
■Notes regarding shift lever and P position switch operation
Avoid repeatedly operating the shift lever and P position switch in quick suc-
cession.
The system protection function may activate and it will not be temporarily
possible to shift the shift position other than P. If this happens, please wait
for a while before attempting to change the shift position again.
211
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Turn signal lever
■Turn signals can be operated when
The “POWER” switch is in ON mode.
■If the indicator flashes faster than usual
Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned
out.
The turn signal lever can be used to show the following intention of
the driver:
Right turn
Left turn
Lane change to the right
(push and hold the lever
partway)
The right hand signals will
flash until you release the
lever.
Lane change to the left
(push and hold the lever
partway)
The left hand signals will flash
until you release the lever.
212
2-1. Driving procedures
Parking brake
■Parking brake engaged warning buzzer
P. 493
■Usage in winter time
P. 317
NOTICE
■Before driving
Fully release the parking brake.
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components
overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake
wear.
To set the parking brake, fully
depress the parking brake
pedal with your left foot while
depressing the brake pedal
with your right foot.
(Depressing the pedal again
releases the parking brake.)
U.S.A. Canada
214
2-2.Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters
The units used on the display may differ depending on the target
region.
The following gauges and meters and display illuminate when the
“POWER” switch is in ON mode:
Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank.
Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed.
Instantaneous fuel consumption
Displays the current rate of fuel consumption.
Shift position indicators
Displays the shift position.
Multi-information display
Presents the driver with a variety of driving-related data. (P. 223)
215
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
Touch tracer display (if equipped)
When the audio control switches,
climate control switches, “DISP”
button or “TRIP” button of the
steering wheel are touched, the
touch tracer display will appear
in front of the gauges, with the
touched button highlighted to
allow the driver to identify the
button that is being operated.
The button can then be operated
by further presses.
If an audio/navigation system is
used that is not compatible with
the steering switches in this vehi-
cle, the audio switch display may
not operate correctly.
216
2-2. Instrument cluster
MPH or km/h button
The speed units can be selected MPH or km/h.
Press the button to switch the
display between MPH and km/h.
217
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
Instrument panel light control
The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted by turn-
ing the dial.
Brighter
Darker
■Brightness of the instrument panel light
If the headlight switch is turned on while the surrounding area is dark, the
instrument panel lights will dim.
218
2-2. Instrument cluster
CAUTION
■To prevent an accident
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the engine and its components
The engine may be overheating if the high coolant temperature warning light
comes on or flashes. In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place, and check the engine after it has cooled completely. (P. 549)
Do not place anything or attach a sticker
in front of the instrument cluster. The item
may obscure or obstruct the display, or
could reflect off the display, possibly
causing an accident.
Instrument cluster
219
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
Indicators and warning lights
The indicator and warning lights on the instrument cluster and
instrument panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s vari-
ous systems.
For the purpose of explanation, the following illustration displays all
indicators and warning lights illuminated.
Instrument cluster
Some indicators and the units used on the display may differ
depending on the target region.
Instrument panel
220
2-2. Instrument cluster
■Indicators
The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the
vehicle’s various systems.
Turn signal indicator
(P. 211)
“ECO MODE”
indicator (P. 204)
(U.S.A.)
Headlight indicator
(P. 250)
Power mode indicator
(P. 204)
(Canada)
Tail light indicator
(P. 250)
(if equipped)
Cruise control indicator
(P. 266, 270)
Headlight high beam
indicator (P. 253)
(if equipped)
Radar cruise control
indicator (P. 270)
Front fog light indicator
(P. 256)
(if equipped)
“SET” indicator
(P. 266, 270)
Security indicator
(P. 135)
(if equipped)
“LKA” indicator
(P. 286)
“READY” indicator
(P. 192)
Slip indicator
(P. 297, 301)
Eco Driving Indicator
Light (P. 225) EV indicator (P. 225)
*1, 2
221
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
*1: These lights turn on when the “POWER” switch is turned to the ON
mode to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will
turn off after the hybrid system is on, or after a few seconds. There
may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or if the
lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
*2: The light flashes to indicate that the system is operating.
*3: The light comes on when the system is turned off. The light flashes
faster than usual to indicate that the system is operating.
EV drive mode indica-
tor (P. 199)
(if equipped)
“PCS” warning
(P. 304)
Shift position indicators
(P. 202) “AIR BAG ON/OFF” indicator
(P. 154)
*1, 3
222
2-2. Instrument cluster
CAUTION
■If a safety system warning light does not come on
Should a safety system light such as the ABS and SRS airbag warning light
not come on when you start the hybrid system, this could mean that these
systems are not available to help protect you in an accident, which could
result in death or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer immediately if this occurs.
■Warning lights
Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in any of the
vehicle’s systems. (P. 493)
*1: These lights turn on when the “POWER” switch is turned to ON
mode to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will
turn off after the hybrid system is on, or after a few seconds. There
may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or if
the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
*2: The light flashes to indicate a malfunction.
(U.S.A.) (Canada) (U.S.A.) (Canada)
(red) (yellow)
(if equipped)
(U.S.A.) (Canada)
(if equipped) (if equipped)
(if equipped)
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1, 2
*1
*2
*2
*1
*1
223
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
Multi-information display
The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of
driving-related data, including the clock.
●Energy monitor (P. 42)
●Hybrid System Indicator (P. 225)
●5-minute/1-minute fuel consumption (P. 50)
●Monthly fuel consumption record/eco savings record (P. 53)
●Odometer/trip meter/distance to empty (P. 228)
●Clock (P. 230)
●Calendar (P. 230)
●Dynamic radar cruise control display (if equipped) (P. 270)
●Lane-keeping assist display (if equipped) (P. 286)
●Warning messages (P. 507)
224
2-2. Instrument cluster
Switching the display
To switch the display, press
“DISP” button.
On vehicles with touch tracer dis-
play, the steering switches opera-
tion status is displayed on the
instrument cluster for confirma-
tion purposes. (P. 215)
To switch the odometer, trip
meter and distance to empty,
press “TRIP” button.
225
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
Hybrid System Indicator
Hybrid System Indicator displays the hybrid system operating condi-
tion and provides Eco-friendly driving assistance in accordance with
the driving conditions and the acceleration.
■Names and meaning of each icons
Hybrid battery (traction bat-
tery) status (P. 48)
EV indicator
The EV indicator comes on when
driving the vehicle using only the
electric motor (traction motor).
Eco Driving Indicator Light
Turns on when the vehicle is
driven in Eco-friendly.
Hybrid System Indicator
Refer to “Reading Hybrid System
Indicator” below.
Average speed*
Average fuel consumption/eco
savings*
Use the displayed average fuel
consumption as a reference.
*:The current amount since the trip
meter was reset will be displayed.
These functions can be reset by
pressing and holding the “TRIP”
button.
The display can be switched
between average fuel consump-
tion/average speed and eco sav-
ings. (P. 232)
226
2-2. Instrument cluster
■Reading Hybrid System Indicator
Charge area
Eco area
Power area
Hybrid Eco area
As shown below, the driving conditions of the vehicle can be con-
firmed by checking the status of the indicator bar.
227
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
*1: The images are examples only, and may vary slightly from actual condi-
tions.
*2: The gasoline engine will automatically stop and restart under various
conditions.
Hybrid System Indicator*1
Charge area:
Shows regenerative charging.
(P. 32)
Hybrid Eco area:
Shows that gasoline engine
power is not being used very
often.*2
Eco area:
Shows that the vehicle is
driven in Eco-friendly.
Power area:
Shows that the driving power
is more than the upper limit of
Eco driving (during full power
driving etc.).
228
2-2. Instrument cluster
Odometer/trip meter/distance to empty
■Switching the display
The display changes as follows
each time the “TRIP” button is
pressed. Also, if the button is
kept pressed down while the trip
meter is being displayed, the trip
meter will be reset to 0.
229
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
■Display items
●Odometer
●Trip meter
●Distance to empty
Displays the total distance the vehicle has been
driven.
Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven
since the meter was last reset. Trip meters A and
B can be used to record and display different dis-
tances independently.
Displays the estimated maximum distance that
can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining.
• This distance is computed based on your average
fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance
that can be driven may differ from that displayed.
• When only a small amount of fuel is added to the
tank, the display may not be updated.
When refueling, turn the “POWER” switch off. If the
vehicle is refueled without turning the “POWER”
switch off, the display may not be updated.
230
2-2. Instrument cluster
Clock
The clock can be adjusted by pressing the buttons.
Adjust hours.
Adjust minutes.
Round the nearest hour.*
*: e.g. 1:00 to 1:29 1:00
1:30 to 1:59 2:00
Setting up the displays
Press the “DISP” button until the
“SETTINGS” screen appears.
Calendar will be displayed.
While the vehicle is stopped, press and hold the “DISP” button
until the screen changes.
The selected item will change each time the “DISP” button is
pressed.
STEP
1
STEP
2
231
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
■Setting the gasoline price
Select “GASOLINE PRICE”.
Press and hold the “DISP” button
to enter the setting mode.
Select gasoline price by pressing
the “DISP” or “TRIP” button.
Press and hold the button to
change the amount continuously.
If neither button is operated for
approximately 5 seconds, the set-
ting will be changed and the
screen will return to the previous
display.
STEP
1
STEP
2
232
2-2. Instrument cluster
■Switching the fuel consumption display
Select “FUEL CONSU. DISP.”.
Press and hold the “DISP” button
to enter the setting mode.
Select “CONSUMP.” or “ECO
SAVINGS”.
Press and hold the “DISP” button
to finish setting.
STEP
1
STEP
2
233
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
■Setting the comparison consumption
Select “COMP. CONSUMP-
TION”.
Press and hold the “DISP” button
to enter the setting mode.
Select the comparison consump-
tion by pressing the “DISP” or
“TRIP” button.
Press and hold the button to
change the amount continuously.
If neither button is operated for
approximately 5 seconds, the set-
ting will be changed and the
screen will return to the previous
display.
STEP
1
STEP
2
234
2-2. Instrument cluster
■Setting the calendar
Select “CALENDAR”.
Press and hold the “DISP” button
to enter the setting mode.
Select the date by pressing the
“DISP” or “TRIP” button.
Press and hold the button to
change the date continuously.
If neither button is operated for
approximately 5 seconds, the set-
ting will be changed and the
screen will return to the previous
display.
STEP
1
STEP
2
235
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
■Switching the EV indicator and Eco Driving Indicator Light
activated or deactivated
Select “EV/ECO”.
Press and hold the “DISP” button
to enter the setting mode.
Select “ON” or “OFF”.
Press and hold the “DISP” button
to finish setting.
STEP
1
STEP
2
236
2-2. Instrument cluster
■Switching the steering switch operation display on/off (if
equipped)
Select “STEERING SWITCH”.
Press and hold the “DISP” button
to enter the setting mode.
Select “ON” or “OFF”.
Press and hold the “DISP” button
to finish setting.
STEP
1
STEP
2
237
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
■Selecting 12h/24h clock display
Select “CLOCK”.
Press and hold the “DISP” button
to enter the setting mode.
Select “12h” or “24h”.
Press and hold the “DISP” button
to finish setting.
STEP
1
STEP
2
238
2-2. Instrument cluster
■Selecting the language
Select “LANGUAGE”.
Press and hold the “DISP” button
to enter the setting mode.
Select the language you want to
read.
Press and hold the “DISP” button
to set the language.
STEP
1
STEP
2
239
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
■Turning off the multi-information display
Select “SCREEN OFF”.
Press and hold the “DISP” button
to enter the setting mode.
Select “OFF”.
Press and hold the “DISP” button
to turn off the multi-information
display.
To re-display the multi-information
display, press the “DISP” button
to display the “SETTINGS”
screen and follow the same pro-
cedure, selecting “ON” instead of
“OFF”.
■Returning to the previous screen
Select “EXIT” and press and
hold the “DISP” button.
The screen will revert to the
“SETTINGS” screen.
STEP
1
STEP
2
240
2-2. Instrument cluster
■System check display
■Ending display
P. 197
■Eco Driving Indicator Light
Eco Driving Indicator Light will turn on when driving power is lower than the
upper limit of Eco driving. It will turn off when the acceleration exceeds the
Eco driving accelerator upper limit or when the vehicle is stopped.
Eco Driving Indicator Light will not operate in the following conditions:
●The shift position is anything other than D.
●The driving mode is set to power mode or EV drive mode. (P. 199, 204)
●The vehicle speed is approximately 80 mph (130 km/h) or higher.
Eco Driving Indicator Light is also displayed when 5-minute consumption, 1-
minute consumption, monthly fuel consumption record or eco savings record
is displayed.
Eco Driving Indicator Light can be set to activated or deactivated. (P. 235)
After switching the “POWER” switch to
ON mode, “welcome to PRIUS” is dis-
played while system operation is
checked. When the system check is com-
plete, the normal screen will return.
241
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
■Driving in Eco drive mode
The multi-information display will automatically switch the display to Hybrid
System Indicator, regardless of which display is currently being shown.
(P. 225)
■Touch tracer display
●The touch tracer display can be set to not display even if the steering
switches are touched.
●Only the circular, rubber-covered switches have a built-in touch sensor.
Touching any of the other switches will not display the touch tracer dis-
play.
■Display settings can be changed when
The vehicle speed is less than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h).
■Engine speed
On hybrid vehicles, engine speed is precisely controlled in order to help
improve fuel efficiency and reduce exhaust emissions etc. There are times
when the engine speed that is displayed may differ even when vehicle oper-
ation and driving conditions are the same.
■When the 12-volt battery is disconnected
The following data will be reset.
●Average fuel consumption
●Distance to empty
●Average vehicle speed
●Clock
●Display settings
●Trip meter
242
2-2. Instrument cluster
■Vacuum fluorescent display
Small spots or light spots may appear on the display. This phenomenon is
characteristic of vacuum fluorescent displays, and there is no problem to
continue using the display.
NOTICE
■Steering switches
To prevent damage to the steering switches, observe the following precau-
tions.
●Do not touch the steering switches with wet hands
●Do not push hard or sharp objects into the steering switches
●Do not subject the steering switches to strong impacts
●Do not allow organic solvents containing thinner, benzene or gasoline, or
acidic/alkaline soap to adhere to the surfaces of the steering switches
243
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
Head-up display
: If equipped
The head-up display can be used to project vehicle speed and other
information onto the windshield.
Head-up display
Display brightness will change
automatically according to the
brightness of the surrounding
area.
HUD (Head-up display)
main switch
Turn-by-turn navigation
switch (if equipped)
Display position adjustment
switch
Display brightness adjust-
ment switch
Used to adjust the display
brightness to the desired level.
244
2-2. Instrument cluster
■Head-up display contents
●Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed.
●Hybrid System Indicator
Provides assistance for Eco-friendly driving.
●Turn-by-turn navigation*
Displays a notification of upcoming intersections during navigation
system route guidance. (P. 247)
●Dynamic radar cruise control*
Indicates that there is a possibility of collision. (P. 270)
●PCS (Pre-Collision System)*
Displays the approach warning. (P. 303)
●LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist)*
Displays a warning message that alerts the driver of a deviation from
the lane through use of the lane departure warning function.
(P. 498)
*: If equipped
245
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
Switching the head-up display
Display items can be switched by pressing the “HUD” main switch.
Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed.
Speedometer and Hybrid Sys-
tem Indicator
Displays Hybrid System Indicator
under the speedometer.
(P. 225)
Off
When on, the indicator light on
the “HUD” main switch comes on.
Switching the turn-by-turn navigation display (if equipped)
On/off
When on, the indicator light on
the “NAVI” button comes on.
246
2-2. Instrument cluster
Setting up the display
■Setting the brightness
The brightness of the display is automatically adjusted in accor-
dance with the brightness of the surrounding environment. How-
ever, the brightness can also be manually adjusted in 5 stages.
Darker
Brighter
The brightness can be manually
adjusted in 5 stages.
■Adjusting the display position
Lower
Higher
247
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
Turn-by-turn navigation display (if equipped)
When the vehicle approaches an
intersection, the direction the
vehicle should go is guided by
the arrow.
When the vehicle approaches an
intersection, the route guidance
will start and the distance* to the
intersection will also be dis-
played.
*: The distance decreases in incre-
ments of 100 ft. (30 m) and the
distance indication will disappear
when the vehicle passes through
the intersection.
■System check display
When the “POWER” switch is turned OFF while the head-up display is on,
and is then turned again to ON mode, “welcome to PRIUS” is displayed
while system operation is checked. When the system check is complete, the
normal screen will return.
248
2-2. Instrument cluster
■When driving on snowy roads or in other bright environments
When the highest level of brightness has been reached, the display can be
made even brighter by pressing and holding “” on the brightness control
button.
Pressing “” on the brightness control button or turning the “POWER” switch
off will cause the brightness level to revert to the original level.
■Display speed setting function
The speedometer can be set to display only when a desired vehicle speed is
reached.
Press and hold the “HUD” main switch while the vehicle is stopped
and while the head-up display is showing only the speedometer.
The speedometer will begin to flash.
Set the desired display speed on the speedometer by pressing “”
and “” on the display position adjustment button.
Press “” to raise the speed and “” to lower. The speed will change
by 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the button is pressed, and continu-
ously by 10 mph (16 km/h) when the button is pressed and held.
Press and hold the “HUD” main switch to finish setting.
■Head-up display
The head-up display may seem dark and hard to see when viewed through
sunglasses, especially polarized sunglasses.
Adjust the brightness of the head-up display or remove your sunglasses.
■When the 12-volt battery is disconnected
The head-up display settings will be reset.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
249
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
CAUTION
■Before using the head-up display
Check that the position and brightness of the head-up display image does
not interfere with safe driving. Incorrect adjustment of the image’s position or
brightness may obstruct the driver’s view and lead to an accident, resulting
in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the components
If an object falls into the opening of the
head-up display, remove it immediately.
Also, avoid spilling water or other liquids
near the head-up display opening as this
may cause mechanical damage.
250
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Headlight switch
The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.
Turning the end of the lever turns on the lights as follows:
Type A
The headlights, park-
ing lights and so on
turn on and off auto-
matically (when the
“POWER” switch is
in ON mode).
The side marker,
parking, tail, license
plate and instrument
panel lights turn on.
The headlights and
all the lights listed
above turn on.
The daytime running
lights turn off.
(if equipped)
251
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
2
When driving
Type B
The lights (except
daytime running
lights) turn off.
The side marker,
parking, tail, license
plate and instrument
panel lights turn on.
The headlights and
all the lights listed
above turn on.
The headlights, park-
ing lights and so on
turn on and off auto-
matically (when the
“POWER” switch is
in ON mode).
252
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Type C
The daytime running
lights turn on.
The side marker,
parking, tail, license
plate, daytime run-
ning lights and instru-
ment panel lights turn
on.
The headlights and
all the lights listed
above (except day-
time running lights)
turn on.
The headlights, park-
ing lights, daytime
running lights and so
on turn on and off
automatically (when
the “POWER” switch
is in ON mode).
253
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
2
When driving
Turning on the high beam headlights
With the headlights on, push
the lever away from you to
turn on the high beams.
Pull the lever toward you to the
center position to turn the high
beams off.
Pull the lever toward you and
release it to flash the high
beams once.
You can flash the high beams
with the headlights on or off.
■Daytime running light system
●For the U.S.A.: To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the
daytime running lights turn on automatically whenever the hybrid system
is started and the parking brake is released.
Daytime running lights can be turned off by operating the switch. (if
equipped)
For Canada: To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the day-
time running lights turn on automatically (at a reduced intensity) whenever
the hybrid system is started and the parking brake is released. Daytime
running lights are not designed for use at night.
●For Canada: Compared to turning on the headlights, the daytime running
light system offers greater durability and consumes less electricity, so it
can help improve fuel economy.
254
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
■Headlight control sensor (if equipped)
■Automatic light off system
●When the headlights come on: The headlights and tail lights turn off 30
seconds after a door is opened and closed if the “POWER” switch is
turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. (The lights turn off immedi-
ately if on the key is pressed after all the doors are locked.)
●When only the tail lights come on: The tail lights turn off automatically if
the “POWER” switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off and
the driver’s door is opened.
To turn the lights on again, turn the “POWER” switch to ON mode, or turn the
light switch off once and then back to or .
The sensor may not function properly if
an object is placed on the sensor, or any-
thing that blocks the sensor is affixed to
the windshield.
Doing so interferes with the sensor
detecting the level of ambient light and
may cause the automatic headlight sys-
tem to malfunction.
Air conditioning operation may also be
interrupted.
ITO23P105
255
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
2
When driving
■Automatic headlight leveling system (if equipped)
The level of the headlights is automatically adjusted according to the number
of passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle to ensure that the
headlights do not interfere with other road users.
■Customization
Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitivity) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 590)
NOTICE
■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is
off.
256
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Fog light switch
: If equipped
The fog lights secure excellent visibility in difficult driving condi-
tions, such as in rain and fog.
Type A
Turns the fog lights
off
Turns the fog lights
on
257
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
2
When driving
■Fog lights can be used when
The headlights are on in low beam.
NOTICE
■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is
off.
Type B
Turns the fog lights
off
Turns the fog lights
on
258
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Windshield wipers and washer
When intermittent windshield wiper operation is selected, wiper
intervals can be also adjusted.
The wiper operation is selected by moving the lever as follows.
Type A
Intermittent wind-
shield wiper opera-
tion
Low speed wind-
shield wiper opera-
tion
High speed wind-
shield wiper opera-
tion
Temporary operation
Increases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency
(if equipped)
Decreases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency
(if equipped)
259
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
2
When driving
Washer/wiper dual opera-
tion
The wipers will automatically
operate a couple of times after
the washer squirts.
If the headlights are on, the
headlight cleaner will operate
once.
Type B
Intermittent wind-
shield wiper opera-
tion
Low speed wind-
shield wiper opera-
tion
High speed wind-
shield wiper opera-
tion
Temporary operation
260
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
■The windshield wipers and washer can be operated when
The “POWER” switch is in ON mode.
■If no windshield washer fluid sprays
Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the
washer fluid tank.
Increases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency
(if equipped)
Decreases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency
(if equipped)
Washer/wiper dual opera-
tion
The wipers will automatically
operate a couple of times after
the washer squirts.
If the headlights are on, the
headlight cleaner will operate
once.
261
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
2
When driving
CAUTION
■Caution regarding the use of washer fluid
When it is cold, do not use the washer fluid until the windshield becomes
warm. The fluid may freeze on the windshield and cause low visibility. This
may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■When the windshield is dry
Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.
■When the washer fluid tank is empty
Do not operate the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may over-
heat.
■When a nozzle becomes blocked
In this case, contact your Toyota dealer.
Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.
■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Do not leave the wipers on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is
off.
262
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Rear window wiper and washer
: If equipped
Turning the end of the lever turns on the rear window wiper and
washer as follows:
Type A
Intermittent window
wiper operation
Normal window wiper
operation
Washer/wiper dual
operation
Washer/wiper dual
operation
263
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
2
When driving
■The rear window wiper and washer can be operated when
The “POWER” switch is in ON mode.
■If no washer fluid sprays
Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the
washer fluid reservoir.
Type B
Intermittent window
wiper operation
Normal window wiper
operation
Washer/wiper dual
operation
Washer/wiper dual
operation
264
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
NOTICE
■When the rear window is dry
Do not use the wiper, as it may damage the rear window.
■When the washer fluid tank is empty
Do not operate the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may over-
heat.
265
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
2
When driving
Headlight cleaner switch
: If equipped
■The headlight cleaners can be operated when
The “POWER” switch is in ON mode and the headlight switch is turned on.
If equipped, the headlight switch is in the “AUTO” position and the headlight
is on.
■Windshield washer linked operation
Only for the first time when the windshield washer is operated with the
“POWER” switch in ON mode and the headlights on, the headlight cleaners
will operate once. (P. 258)
NOTICE
■When the washer fluid tank is empty
Do not press the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may overheat.
Washer fluid can be sprayed on the headlights.
Press the switch to clean the
headlights.
266
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control
: If equipped
Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without depressing
the accelerator pedal.
Cruise control switch
Indicators
■Setting the vehicle speed
Press the “ON-OFF” button to
activate the cruise control.
Cruise control indicator will
come on.
Press the button again to
deactivate the cruise control.
Accelerate or decelerate the
vehicle to the desired speed,
and push the lever down to set
the speed.
“SET” indicator will come on.
The vehicle speed at the
moment the lever is released
becomes the set speed.
STEP
1
STEP
2
267
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
■Adjusting the set speed
To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set
speed is obtained.
Increases the speed
Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Momentarily
move the lever in the desired
direction.
Large adjustment: Hold the
lever in the desired direction.
The set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time
the lever is operated.
Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or
decreased continually until the lever is released.
■Canceling and resuming the constant speed control
Pulling the lever toward you
cancels the constant speed
control.
The speed setting is also can-
celed when the brakes are
applied.
Pushing the lever up
resumes the constant
speed control.
Resuming is available when
the vehicle speed is more
than approximately 25 mph
(40 km/h).
ITO24P105
ITO24P106
268
2-4. Using other driving systems
■Cruise control can be set when
●The shift position is in D.
●Vehicle speed is above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
■Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed
●The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set
speed resumes.
●Even without canceling the cruise control, the set speed can be
increased by first accelerating the vehicle to the desired speed and then
pushing the lever down to set the new speed.
■Automatic cruise control cancelation
Cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in any of the following
situations.
●Actual vehicle speed falls more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h)
below the preset vehicle speed.
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.
●Actual vehicle speed is below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
●Enhanced VSC is activated.
■If the cruise control indicator light flashes
Press the “ON-OFF” button once to deactivate the system, and then press
the button again to reactivate the system.
If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels
immediately after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise
control system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
269
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
CAUTION
■To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake
Switch the cruise control off using the “ON-OFF” button when not in use.
■Situations unsuitable for cruise control
Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in loss of control and could cause an accident resulting
in death or serious injury.
●In heavy traffic
●On roads with sharp bends
●On winding roads
●On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
●On steep hills
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
●During emergency towing
270
2-4. Using other driving systems
Dynamic radar cruise control
: If equipped
Dynamic radar cruise control supplements conventional cruise con-
trol with a vehicle-to-vehicle distance control. In vehicle-to-vehicle
distance control mode, the vehicle automatically accelerates or
decelerates in order to maintain a set following distance from vehi-
cles ahead.
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
button
Display
Set speed
Indicators
Cruise control switch
271
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
■Setting the vehicle speed (vehicle-to-vehicle distance con-
trol mode)
Press the “ON-OFF” button to
activate the cruise control.
Radar cruise control indicator
will come on.
Press the button again to
deactivate the cruise control.
Accelerate or decelerate the
vehicle to the desired speed,
and push the lever down to set
the speed.
“SET” indicator will come on.
The vehicle speed at the
moment the lever is released
becomes the set speed.
STEP
1
STEP
2
272
2-4. Using other driving systems
■Adjusting the set speed
To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set
speed is displayed.
Increases the speed
Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Momentarily
move the lever in the desired
direction.
Large adjustment: Hold the
lever in the desired direction.
In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the set speed will be
increased or decreased as follows:
• When the set speed is shown in “MPH”
Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the
lever is operated
Large adjustment: By approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) for each 0.75
seconds the lever is held
• When the set speed is shown in “km/h”
Fine adjustment: By approximately 0.6 mph (1 km/h) each time the
lever is operated
Large adjustment: By approximately 3.1 mph (5 km/h) for each 0.75
seconds the lever is held
In the constant speed control mode (P. 278), the set speed will be
increased or decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the
lever is operated
Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased con-
tinually until the lever is released.
ITO24P126
273
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
■Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
Pressing the button changes
the vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance as follows:
Long
Medium
Short
The vehicle-to-vehicle distance
is set automatically to long
mode when the “POWER”
switch is turned to ON mode.
If a vehicle is running ahead of
you, the preceding vehicle
mark will also be displayed.
■Vehicle-to-vehicle distance settings
Select a distance from the table below. Note that the distances
shown correspond to a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Vehi-
cle-to-vehicle distance increases/decreases in accordance with
vehicle speed.
Preceding vehicle mark
Distance options Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
Long Approximately 160 ft. (50 m)
Medium Approximately 130 ft. (40 m)
Short Approximately 100 ft. (30 m)
274
2-4. Using other driving systems
■Canceling and resuming the speed control
Pulling the lever toward you
cancels the cruise control.
The speed setting is also can-
celed when the brakes are
applied.
Pushing the lever up
resumes the cruise control
and returns vehicle speed
to the set speed.
Resuming is available when
the vehicle speed is more
than approximately 25 mph
(40 km/h).
ITO24P127
275
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
This mode employs a radar sensor to detect the presence of vehicles
up to approximately 400 ft. (120 m) ahead, determines the current
vehicle-to-vehicle following distance, and operates to maintain a suit-
able following distance from the vehicle ahead.
Note that vehicle-to-vehicle distance will close in when traveling on long
downhill slopes.
276
2-4. Using other driving systems
Example of constant speed cruising
When there are no vehicles ahead
The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver. The desired vehicle-to-
vehicle distance can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance control.
Example of deceleration cruising
When the vehicle ahead is driving slower than the set speed
When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, the system automati-
cally decelerates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in vehicle speed
is necessary, the system applies the brakes. A warning tone warns you
when the system cannot decelerate sufficiently to prevent your vehicle
from closing in on the vehicle ahead.
Example of follow-up cruising
When following a vehicle driving slower than the set speed
The system continues follow-up cruising while adjusting for changes in the
speed of the vehicle ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance set by the driver.
Example of acceleration
When there are no longer any vehicles ahead driving slower than
the set speed
The system accelerates until the set speed is reached. The system then
returns to constant speed cruising.
277
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
Approach warning
When your vehicle is too close to a vehicle ahead, and sufficient
automatic deceleration via the cruise control is not possible, the dis-
play will flash and the buzzer will sound to alert the driver. An exam-
ple of this would be if another driver cuts in front of you while you are
following a vehicle. Apply the brakes to ensure an appropriate vehi-
cle-to-vehicle distance.
■Warnings may not occur when
In the following instances, there is a possibility that the warnings
will not occur:
●When the speed of the vehicle ahead matches or exceeds your
vehicle speed
●When the vehicle ahead is traveling at an extremely slow speed
●Immediately after the cruise control speed was set
●At the instant the accelerator is applied
278
2-4. Using other driving systems
Selecting conventional constant speed control mode
Constant speed control mode differs from vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode. When constant speed mode is selected, your vehicle
will maintain a set speed regardless of whether or not there are other
vehicles in the lane ahead.
Press the “ON-OFF” button to
activate the cruise control.
Press the button again to deacti-
vate the cruise control.
Switch to constant speed con-
trol mode.
(Push the lever forward and
hold for approximately 1 sec-
ond.)
Cruise control indicator will come
on.
When in constant speed control
mode, to return to vehicle-to-vehi-
cle distance control mode, push
the lever forward again and hold
for approximately 1 second.
After the desired speed has been
set, it is not possible to return to
vehicle-to-vehicle distance con-
trol mode.
279
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
If the “POWER” switch is turned
off and then turned to ON mode
again, the vehicle will automati-
cally return to vehicle-to-vehicle
distance control mode.
Adjusting the speed setting:
P. 272
Canceling and resuming the
speed setting: P. 274
■Dynamic radar cruise control can be set when
●The shift position is in D.
●Vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph (50 km/h).
■Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed
The vehicle can accelerate normally. After acceleration, the set speed
resumes. However, during vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the
vehicle speed may decrease below the set speed in order to maintain the
distance to the vehicle ahead.
■Set speed
The set speed may be unsustainable depending on driving circumstances.
280
2-4. Using other driving systems
■Automatic cancelation of vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled in the
following situations:
●Actual vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
●Enhanced VSC is activated.
●The sensor cannot operate correctly because it is covered in some way.
●The windshield wipers are operating at high speed (when the wiper
switch is set to the high speed windshield wiper operation position).
If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled for any
other reason, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Toyota
dealer.
■Automatic cancelation of constant speed control
The cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in the following sit-
uations:
●Actual vehicle speed is more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h)
below the set vehicle speed.
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.
●Vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
●Enhanced VSC is activated.
■Radar sensor and grille cover
Always keep the sensor and grille cover clean to ensure that the vehicle-to-
vehicle distance control operates properly. (Some obstructions, such as
snow, ice and plastic objects, cannot be detected by the obstruction sensor.)
Dynamic radar cruise control (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode) will
be canceled if dirt is detected. (Constant speed control mode can be used).
Grille cover
Radar sensor
281
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
■Warning lights, messages and buzzers for dynamic radar cruise con-
trol
Warning lights, warning messages and buzzers are used to indicate a sys-
tem malfunction or to inform the driver of the need for caution while driving.
■Certification
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: HYQDNMWR004
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Radiofrequency radiation exposure Information:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of
20 cm between the radiator (antenna) and your body.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
282
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■Before using dynamic radar cruise control
Do not overly rely on vehicle-to-vehicle distance control.
Be aware of the set speed. If automatic deceleration/acceleration is not
appropriate, adjust the vehicle speed, as well as the distance between your
vehicle and vehicles ahead by applying the brakes etc.
■Cautions regarding the driving assist systems
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
●Assisting the driver to measure following distance
The dynamic radar cruise control is only intended to help the driver in
determining the following distance between the driver’s own vehicle and a
designated vehicle traveling ahead. It is not a mechanism that allows care-
less or inattentive driving, and it is not a system that can assist the driver in
low-visibility conditions. It is still necessary for driver to pay close attention
to the vehicle’s surroundings.
●Assisting the driver to judge proper following distance
The dynamic radar cruise control determines whether the following dis-
tance between the driver’s own vehicle and a designated vehicle traveling
ahead is appropriate or not. It is not capable of making any other type of
judgement. Therefore, it is absolutely necessary for the driver to remain
vigilant and to determine whether or not there is a possibility of danger in
any given situation.
●Assisting the driver to operate the vehicle
The dynamic radar cruise control has no capability to prevent or avoid a
collision with a vehicle traveling ahead. Therefore, if there is ever any dan-
ger, the driver must take immediate and direct control of the vehicle and
act appropriately in order to ensure the safety of all involved.
283
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
CAUTION
■To avoid inadvertent cruise control activation
Switch the cruise control off using the “ON-OFF” button when not in use.
■Situations unsuitable for dynamic radar cruise control
Do not use dynamic radar cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in inappropriate speed control and could cause an acci-
dent resulting in death or serious injury.
●In heavy traffic
●On roads with sharp bends
●On winding roads
●On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
●On steep downhills, or where there are sudden changes between sharp up
and down gradients
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
●At entrances to expressways
●When weather conditions are bad enough that they may prevent the sen-
sors from functioning correctly (fog, snow, sandstorm, heavy rain, etc.)
●When an approach warning buzzer is heard often
●During emergency towing
284
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■When the sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead
Apply the brakes as necessary when any of the following types of vehicles
are in front of you.
As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect these types of vehicles,
the approach warning (P. 277) will not be activated, and a fatal or serious
accident may result.
●Vehicles that cut in suddenly
●Vehicles traveling at low speeds
●Vehicles that are not moving
●Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board etc.)
●Motorcycles traveling in the same lane
■Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control may
not function correctly
Apply the brakes as necessary in the following conditions as the radar sen-
sor may not be able to correctly detect vehicles ahead, and a fatal or serious
accident may result:
●When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the
functioning of the sensor
●When your vehicle is pointing upwards (caused by a heavy load in the lug-
gage compartment etc.)
●When the road curves or when the lanes are narrow
●When steering wheel operation or your position in the lane is unstable
●When the vehicle ahead of you decelerates suddenly
285
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
CAUTION
■Handling the radar sensor
Observe the following to ensure the cruise control system can function effec-
tively.
Otherwise, the system may not function correctly and could result in an acci-
dent.
●Keep the sensor and grille cover clean at all times.
Clean the sensor and grille cover with a soft cloth so you do not mark or
damage them.
●Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.
If the sensor has moved out of position, the system may malfunction or
operate incorrectly. If the sensor or surrounding area is subject to a strong
impact, always have the area inspected and adjusted by a Toyota dealer.
●Do not disassemble the sensor.
●Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille cover or sur-
rounding area.
●Do not modify or paint the sensor and grille cover.
●Do not replace them with non-genuine parts.
286
2-4. Using other driving systems
LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist)
: If equipped
While driving on a freeway or motor highway that has lane markings,
this system recognizes the lanes using a camera as a sensor to
assist the driver with staying in the lane. The LKA system has two
functions.
■Lane departure warning function
If the system judges that the vehicle may deviate from its lane, it
alerts the driver using rapid beeping, indications on the multi-
information display, and a sensory warning* given via the steer-
ing wheel.
*: A slight steering torque is applied for a short period of time in
the direction of the center of the lane.
■Lane keeping assist function
This function will be active when the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode of the cruise control (P. 270) is set with vehicle
speed above approx. 50 mph (approx. 75 km/h) and while the
lane departure warning function is active. When the lane keep-
ing assist function is active, a slight steering torque will be
applied, to help the driver maintain the vehicle inside the lane.
287
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
■Turning the LKA system on
The lane departure warning function and lane keeping assist
function will be automatically activated depending on the recog-
nition condition of lane markings, vehicle speed and the setting
of radar cruise control (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode).
Press the LKA switch to acti-
vate the system.
“LKA” indicator will come on.
Press the switch again to turn
the LKA system off.
288
2-4. Using other driving systems
■Operating conditions for each function
*1: Vehicle speed is between about 30 and 124 mph (50 and 200 km/h).
*2: Vehicle speed is between about 50 and 112 mph (75 and 180 km/h).
“LKA”
switch
Cruise control
(vehicle-to-vehicle
distance control mode)
Lane departure
warning
function*1
Lane keeping
assist
function*2
On
Off Available Not available
On
(While cruising in vehi-
cle-to-vehicle distance
control mode with the
set vehicle speed
approx. 45 mph
[approx. 70 km/h]
or less)
Available Not available
On
(While cruising in vehi-
cle-to-vehicle distance
control mode with the
set vehicle speed
approx. 50 mph
[approx. 75 km/h]
or more)
Available Available
289
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
Indication on the multi-information display
While the LKA system is on, the lane line display and steering wheel
display (in case of lane keeping assist function) are shown on the
multi-information display to inform that the LKA system is on.
Steering wheel display
The lane keeping assist function
is active.
Dynamic radar cruise control
display
Lane line display
When thin lines are shown:
A lane marking is not recognized
by the system, or the LKA system
functions are temporarily can-
celed.
When solid lane lines are shown:
The lane departure warning func-
tion is active.
290
2-4. Using other driving systems
■Temporary cancelation of the LKA system functions
If any of the following occurs, the LKA system functions will be temporarily
canceled. The functions will resume after the necessary operating conditions
have returned.
●The turn signal lever is operated.
●The steering wheel is turned as far as necessary to cause the vehicle to
change lanes.
●The brake pedal is depressed.
However, the lane keeping assist function will not resume even after the
brake pedal is released because depressing the brake pedal also can-
cels the dynamic radar cruise control. (Only lane departure warning func-
tion will resume.)
●The vehicle speed deviates from the operating range of the LKA system
functions.
●When the lane lines cannot be recognized while driving.
●The wiper operates continuously.
■When the lane departure warning function is activated
The lane departure warning function will be temporarily canceled and will not
resume until a few seconds elapse after it is activated.
291
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
■No-handed driving warning
If the steering wheel is not operated for about 15 seconds on a straight road
or about 5 seconds on a curve, the buzzer will beep twice, indicators on the
multi-information display will flash, and the lane keeping assist function will
be temporarily canceled. If you drive the vehicle with your hands lightly
touching the steering wheel, this may also be detected as no-handed driv-
ing.
■When the vehicle has been parked in the sun
The LKA system functions may not be available for a while after driving has
started. In such cases, turn the LKA system off and turn it on again after nor-
mal temperature returns. When the temperature in the cabin decreases and
the temperature around the camera sensor becomes suitable for its opera-
tion, the functions will begin to operate.
■Warning lights and warning messages for LKA
Warning lights and messages are used to indicate a system malfunction or
to inform the driver of the need for caution while driving. (P. 496, 510)
CAUTION
■Before using the LKA system
Do not rely on the LKA system to remain within a selected lane. The LKA
system is not designed to enable inattentive driving. The steering wheel
should be operated by the driver to maintain the vehicle in a suitable position
within its lane. Always drive carefully.
292
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■Turn the LKA off while driving in any of the following conditions
Do not use LKA in any of the following situations.
Otherwise, the system may not function correctly and could result in an acci-
dent.
●When driving with snow tires, snow chains, a spare tire, or similar equip-
ment.
●When driving with non-standard parts or aftermarket equipment installed.
(including modified tires and suspensions, etc.)
●When there are objects or structures along the roadside that might be mis-
interpreted as lane markers. (such as guardrails, curb, reflector posts, etc.)
●When there are wheel ruts, icy trademarks, etc. or if snow remains on the
road surface.
●When there are shadows on the road running parallel with lane markers,
or if a shadow covers the lane markers.
●When there are visible lines on the pavement from road repairs, or if the
remains of old lane markers are still visible on the road.
●When driving on slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or
snow.
●When driving in a lane other than the driving or passing lanes on a freeway
or highway.
●When driving on a road with lane closures due to maintenance, or when
driving in a temporary lane.
●When driving on winding roads or roads that are rough or uneven.
293
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
NOTICE
■In the following situations, the LKA will not work, or will not perform
reliably:
●When lane markers are interrupted or are not present, such as before a
tollbooth.
●When lane markers are only on one side of the road.
●When driving on a sharp curve.
●When lanes are extremely narrow or extremely wide.
●When the vehicle leans to one side an unusual amount due to a heavy
load or improper tire inflation pressure.
●When the following distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead
is extremely short.
●When the lane markers are broken, “Botts’ dots”, or “Raised pavement
marker”.
●When lane markers are obscured or partially obscured by sand, dirt, etc.
●When driving on a particularly bright road surface, such as concrete.
●When driving on a road surface that is bright due to reflected light.
294
2-4. Using other driving systems
NOTICE
●When driving in a location where the light level changes rapidly, such as
the entrance to or exit from a tunnel.
●When sunlight or the headlights of oncoming vehicles are shining directly
into the camera lens.
●When driving on roads that are branching or merging.
●When pavement lane markers are difficult to see due to rain, snow, fog,
etc.
●When driving on a road surface that is wet due to rain, previous rainfall,
standing water, etc.
●When the vehicle experiences strong up-and-down motion such as when
driving on an extremely rough road or on a seam in the pavement.
●When headlight brightness is reduced due to dirt on the lenses, or when
the headlights are misaligned.
●When driving with a strong crosswind.
295
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
NOTICE
■Camera sensor
●Keep the windshield clean at all times.
LKA performance may deteriorate due to the presence of raindrops, con-
densation, ice or snow on the windshield.
●Do not attach a sticker or other items to the windshield near the camera
sensor.
●When adjusting the rear view mirror, make sure that it does not block the
camera lens.
●When it is cold, using the heater with air blowing to the feet may allow the
upper part of the windshield to fog up. This will have a negative effect on
the images. In such a case, use the windshield defogger to provide warm,
dry air to the windshield.
●Do not place anything on the dashboard.
The camera sensor may recognize the image reflected on the windshield
as lane markings by mistake.
●Do not scratch the camera lens, or let it get dirty.
●Do not change the installation position of the camera sensor or remove it.
The direction of the camera sensor is precisely adjusted.
●Do not subject the camera sensor to strong impact or force, and do not
disassemble the camera sensor.
Observe the following to ensure that the
LKA system functions correctly.
ITO24P134
296
2-4. Using other driving systems
Driving assist systems
To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following sys-
tems operate automatically in response to various driving situations.
Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and
should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.
■ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if
the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface
■Brake assist
Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is
depressed when the system detects a panic stop situation
■VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)
Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning
on slippery road surfaces
■TRAC (Traction Control)
Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the drive wheels from spin-
ning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads
■EPS (Electric Power Steering)
Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to turn
the steering wheel
■Enhanced VSC (Enhanced Vehicle Stability Control)
Provides cooperative control of the ABS, TRAC, VSC and EPS.
Helps to maintain directional stability when swerving on slippery road
surfaces by controlling steering performance.
298
2-4. Using other driving systems
■Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, VSC and
TRAC
●A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the hybrid
system is started, just after the vehicle begins to move, if the brake pedal
is depressed forcefully or repeatedly, or 1-2 minutes after the hybrid sys-
tem is stopped. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has
occurred in any of these systems.
●Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are
operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.
• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.
• A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.
• The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated.
• The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated.
■EPS operation sound
When the steering wheel is operated, a motor sound (whirring sound) may
be heard. This does not indicate a malfunction.
■Reduced effectiveness of the EPS system
The effectiveness of the EPS system is reduced to prevent the system from
overheating when there is frequent steering input over an extended period of
time. The steering wheel may feel heavy as a result. Should this occur,
refrain from excessive steering input or stop the vehicle and turn the hybrid
system off. The EPS system should return to normal within 10 minutes.
■Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer)
P. 501
299
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
CAUTION
■The ABS does not operate effectively when
●Tires with inadequate gripping ability are used (such as excessively worn
tires on a snow covered road).
●The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on wet or slick road.
■Stopping distance when the ABS is operating may exceed that of nor-
mal conditions
The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance. Always
maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you in the following situ-
ations:
●When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads
●When driving with tire chains
●When driving over bumps in the road
●When driving over roads with potholes or uneven surfaces
■TRAC may not operate effectively when
Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slip-
pery road surfaces, even if the TRAC system is operating.
Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost.
■When the VSC is activated
The slip indicator light flashes. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may
cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes.
300
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■Replacing tires
Make sure that all tires are of the specified size and of the same brand, tread
pattern and total load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are
inflated to the recommended tire inflation pressure level.
The ABS and VSC systems will not function correctly if different tires are
installed on the vehicle.
Contact your Toyota dealer for further information when replacing tires or
wheels.
■Handling of tires and the suspension
Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect
the driving assist systems, and may cause a system to malfunction.
301
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
Hill-start assist control
■Hill-start assist control can be operated when
●The shift position is in a position other than P.
●The parking brake is not applied.
●The accelerator pedal is not depressed.
■Hill-start assist control
●While hill-start assist control is operating, the brakes remain automati-
cally applied after the driver releases the brake pedal. The stop lights and
the high mounted stoplight turn on.
●Hill-start assist control operates for about 2 seconds after the brake pedal
is released.
●If the slip indicator does not flash and the buzzer does not sound when
the brake pedal is further depressed, slightly reduce the pressure on the
brake pedal (do not allow the vehicle to roll backward) and then firmly
depress it again. If the system still does not operate, check if the operat-
ing conditions explained above have been met.
Hill-start assist control helps to prevent the vehicle from rolling
backwards when starting on an incline or slippery slope.
To engage hill-start assist con-
trol, further depress the brake
pedal when the vehicle is
stopped completely.
A buzzer will sound once to
indicate the system is acti-
vated. The slip indicator will
also start flashing.
302
2-4. Using other driving systems
■Hill-start assist control buzzer
●When hill-start assist control is activated, the buzzer will sound once.
●In the following situations, hill-start assist control will be canceled and the
buzzer will sound twice.
• No attempt is made to drive the vehicle within approximately 2 seconds
of releasing the brake pedal.
• Push the P position switch.
• The parking brake is applied.
• The brake pedal is depressed again.
• The brake pedal has been depressed for more than approximately 3
minutes.
■If the slip indicator light comes on
It may indicate a malfunction in the system. Contact your Toyota dealer.
CAUTION
■Hill-start assist control
●Do not overly rely on the hill-start assist control. Hill-start assist control
may not operate effectively on extremely steep inclines or roads covered
in ice.
●Unlike the parking brake, hill-start assist control is not intended to hold the
vehicle stationary for an extended period of time. Do not attempt to use
hill-start assist control to hold the vehicle on an incline for an extended
period of time, as doing so may lead to an accident.
303
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
PCS (Pre-Collision System)
: If equipped
When the radar sensor detects possibility of a frontal collision, the
pre-collision systems such as the brakes and seat belts are automat-
ically engaged to lessen impact as well as vehicle damage.
■Pre-collision seat belts (front seat belts only)
If the pre-collision sensor detects that a collision is unavoidable, the
pre-collision system will retract the seat belt before the collision occurs.
The same will happen if the driver makes an emergency braking or
loses control of the vehicle. (P. 111)
However, when the VSC system is disabled, the system will not oper-
ate in the event of skidding.
■Pre-collision brake assist
When there is a high possibility of a frontal collision, the system applies
greater braking force in relation to how strongly the brake pedal is
depressed.
■Pre-collision braking
When there is a high possibility of a frontal collision, the system warns
the driver using a warning light, warning display and buzzer. If the sys-
tem determines that a collision is unavoidable, the brakes are automat-
ically applied to reduce the collision speed. Pre-collision braking can be
disabled using the pre-collision braking off switch.
304
2-4. Using other driving systems
Disabling pre-collision braking
Pre-collision braking enabled
Pre-collision braking disabled
The “PCS” warning light will
turn on when pre-collision
braking is disabled.
Radar sensor
The radar sensor detects vehi-
cles or other obstacles on or
near the road ahead and deter-
mines whether a collision is
imminent based on the position,
speed, and heading of the obsta-
cles.
305
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
■The pre-collision system is operational when
●Pre-collision seat belts (type A)
• Vehicle speed is greater than about 19 mph (30 km/h).
• The system detects sudden braking or skidding.
• The front occupants are wearing a seat belt.
●Pre-collision seat belts (type B)
• Vehicle speed is greater than about 4 mph (5 km/h).
• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or the
vehicle running ahead of you is greater than about 19 mph (30 km/h).
• The front occupants are wearing a seat belt.
●Pre-collision brake assist:
• Vehicle speed is greater than about 19 mph (30 km/h).
• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or the
vehicle running ahead of you is greater than about 19 mph (30 km/h).
• The brake pedal is depressed.
●Pre-collision braking:
• Vehicle speed is greater than about 10 mph (15 km/h).
• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or the
vehicle running ahead of you is greater than about 10 mph (15 km/h).
• The pre-collision braking off switch is not pressed.
306
2-4. Using other driving systems
■Conditions that may trigger the system even if there is no possibility of
a collision
●When there is an object by the roadside at the entrance to a curve
●When passing an oncoming vehicle on a curve
●When driving over a narrow iron bridge
●When there is a metal object on the road surface
●When driving on an uneven road surface (nose up, nose down)
●When passing an oncoming vehicle on a left-turn
●When your vehicle rapidly closes on the vehicle in front
●When a grade separation/interchange, sign, billboard, or other structure
appears to be directly in the vehicle’s line of travel
●When the steep angle of the road causes a metal object located beneath
the road surface to be seen ahead of the vehicle
●When an extreme change in vehicle height occurs
●When the axis of the radar is out of adjustment
●When passing through certain toll gates
●When passing through an overpass
When the system is activated in the situations described above, there is also
a possibility that the seat belts will retract quickly and the brakes will be
applied with a force greater than normal. When the seat belt is locked in the
retracted position, stop the vehicle in a safe place, release the seat belt and
refasten it.
307
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
■Obstacles not detected
The sensor cannot detect plastic obstacles such as traffic cones. There may
also be occasions when the sensor cannot detect pedestrians, animals,
bicycles, motorcycles, trees, or snowdrifts.
■Situations in which the pre-collision system does not function properly
The system may not function effectively in situations such as the following:
●On roads with sharp bends or uneven surfaces
●If a vehicle suddenly moves in front of vehicle, such as at an intersection
●If a vehicle suddenly cuts in front of vehicle, such as when overtaking
●In inclement weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow or sand storms
●When your vehicle is skidding with the VSC system off
●When an extreme change in vehicle height occurs
●When the axis of the radar is out of adjustment
■Automatic cancelation of the pre-collision system
When a malfunction occurs due to sensor contamination, etc. that results in
the sensors being unable to detect obstacles, the pre-collision system will be
automatically disabled. In this case, the system will not activate even if there
is a collision possibility.
■When there is a malfunction in the system
Warning lights and/or warning messages will turn on or flash. (P. 496, 509)
308
2-4. Using other driving systems
■Certification
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: HYQDNMWR004
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Radiofrequency radiation exposure Information:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of
20 cm between the radiator (antenna) and your body.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
309
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
CAUTION
■Limitations of the pre-collision system
Do not overly rely on the pre-collision system. Always drive safely, taking
care to observe your surroundings and checking for any obstacles or other
road hazards.
Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■Cautions regarding the assist contents of the system
By means of alarms and brake control, the pre-collision system is intended
to assist the driver in avoiding collisions through the process of LOOK-
JUDGE-ACT. There are limits to the degree of assistance the system can
provide, so please keep in mind the following important points.
●Assisting the driver in watching the road
The pre-collision system is only able to detect obstacles directly in front of
the vehicle, and only within a limited range. It is not a mechanism that
allows careless or inattentive driving, and it is not a system that can assist
the driver in low-visibility conditions. It is still necessary for the driver to
pay close attention to the vehicle’s surroundings.
●Assisting the driver in making correct judgement
When attempting to estimate the possibility of a collision, the only data
available to the pre-collision system is that from obstacles it has detected
directly in front of the vehicle. Therefore, it is absolutely necessary for the
driver to remain vigilant and to determine whether or not there is a possi-
bility of collision in any given situation.
●Assisting the driver in taking action
The pre-collision system’s braking assist feature is designed to help
reduce the severity of a collision, and so only acts when the system has
judged that a collision is unavoidable. This system by itself is not capable
of automatically avoiding a collision or bringing the vehicle to a stop safely.
For this reason, when encountering a dangerous situation the driver must
take direct and immediate action in order to ensure the safety of all
involved.
310
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■When the sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead
Apply the brakes as necessary in any of the following situations.
●When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the
functioning of the sensor
●When your vehicle is pointing upwards (caused by a heavy load in the lug-
gage compartment etc.)
●Vehicles that cut in suddenly
●Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board etc.)
●Motorcycles traveling in the same lane
■Handling the radar sensor
Observe the following to ensure the pre-collision system can function effec-
tively:
●Keep the sensor and grille cover clean at all times.
Clean the sensor and grille cover with a soft cloth so you do not mark or
damage them.
●Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.
If the sensor has moved out of position, the system may malfunction or
operate incorrectly. If the sensor or surrounding area is subject to a strong
impact, always have the area inspected and adjusted by your Toyota
dealer.
●Do not disassemble the sensor.
●Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille cover or sur-
rounding area.
●Do not modify or paint the sensor and grille cover.
311
2
When driving
2-5. Driving information
Cargo and luggage
Take notice of the following information about storage precau-
tions, cargo capacity and load:
●Stow cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment whenever
possible.
●Be sure all items are secured in place.
●To maintain vehicle balance while driving, position luggage
evenly within the luggage compartment.
●For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight.
312
2-5. Driving information
Capacity and distribution
Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) — (Total weight of occupants)
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s
placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and lug-
gage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 750 (5150)
= 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being
loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle. (P. 316)
Toyota does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Your
vehicle is not designed for trailer towing.
313
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
Example based on your vehicle
Cargo capacity
Total load capacity
When 2 people with the combined weight of 366 lb. (166 kg) are
riding in your vehicle, which has a total load capacity of 830 lb.
(375 kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity
will be as follows:
825 lb. — 366 lb. = 459 lb. (370 kg —166 kg = 204 kg)
In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of
388 lb. (176 kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be
reduced as follows:
459 lb. — 388 lb. = 71 lb. (204 kg — 176 kg = 28 kg)
As shown in the example above, if the number of occupants
increases, the cargo and luggage load will be reduced by an amount
that equals the increased weight due to the additional occupants. In
other words, if an increase in the number of occupants causes an
excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus
cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on
your vehicle.
314
2-5. Driving information
CAUTION
■Things that must not be carried in the luggage compartment
The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the luggage compart-
ment:
●Receptacles containing gasoline
●Aerosol cans
■Storage precautions
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●Stow cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment whenever possi-
ble.
●Do not stack cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment higher
than the seatbacks.
Such items may be thrown about and possibly injure people in the
vehicle in the event of sudden braking or in an accident.
●Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations as the
item may get under the brake or accelerator pedal and prevent the
pedals from being depressed properly, block the driver’s vision, or hit
the driver or passengers, causing an accident:
• At the feet of the driver
• On the front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)
• On the luggage cover (if equipped)
• On the instrument panel
• On the dashboard
315
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
CAUTION
●Secure all items in the occupant compartment, as they may shift and
injure someone in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
●When you fold down the rear seats, long items should not be place
directly behind the front seats.
●Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage compartment. It is not
designed for passengers. They should ride in their seats with their seat
belts properly fastened. Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer
death or serious bodily injury, in the event of sudden braking or an
accident.
■Capacity and distribution
●Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle
weight rating.
●Even if the total load of occupant’s weight and the cargo load is less
than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper
loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which
may cause death or serious injury.
316
2-5. Driving information
Vehicle load limits
■Total load capacity and seating capacity
These details are also described on the tire and loading information
label. (P. 447)
CAUTION
■Overloading the vehicle
Do not overload the vehicle.
It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and
braking ability, resulting in an accident.
Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity,
towing capacity and cargo capacity.
■Total load capacity: 825 lb. (370 kg)
Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants,
cargo and luggage.
■Seating capacity: 5 occupants (Front 2, Rear 3)
Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants
whose estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.
■Towing capacity
Toyota does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle.
■Cargo capacity
Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the
weight and the number of occupants.
317
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
Winter driving tips
Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving
the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropri-
ate to the prevailing weather conditions.
■Pre-winter preparations
●Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside tem-
peratures.
• Engine oil
• Engine/power control unit coolant
• Washer fluid
●Have a service technician inspect the condition of the 12-volt
battery.
●Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set
of tire chains for the front tires.
Ensure that all tires are the same size and brand, and that chains
match the size of the tires.
318
2-5. Driving information
■Before driving the vehicle
Perform the following according to the driving conditions:
●Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is
frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice.
Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.
●To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan,
remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents
in front of the windshield.
●Check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have
accumulated on the exterior lights, vehicle’s roof, chassis,
around the tires or on the brakes.
●Remove snow or mud from the bottom of your shoes before
getting in the vehicle.
■When driving the vehicle
Accelerate the vehicle slowly, keep a safe distance between you
and the vehicle ahead, and drive at a reduced speed suitable to
road conditions.
■When parking the vehicle
Park the vehicle and shift the shift position to P and block the
wheel under the vehicle without setting the parking brake. The
parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from being released.
If necessary, block the wheels to prevent inadvertent sliding or
creeping.
319
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
Selecting tire chains
Vehicles with 17-inch tires
Use the correct tire chain size when mounting the tire chains. Chain
size is regulated for each tire size.
Side chain:
0.12 in. (3.0 mm)
1.18 in. (30.0 mm)
0.39 in. (10.0 mm)
Cross chain:
0.16 in. (4.0 mm)
0.98 in. (25.0 mm)
0.55 in. (14.0 mm)
Vehicles with 15-inch tires
Use the tire chains of correct size and type.
Use SAE Class “S” type radial tire chains except radial cable chains
or V-bar type chains.
Regulations on the use of tire chains
Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary depending on loca-
tion and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing
chains.
320
2-5. Driving information
■Tire chain installation
Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains:
●Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.
●Install tire chains on the front tires only. Do not install tire chains on the
rear tires.
●Install tire chains on front tires as tightly as possible. Retighten chains
after driving 1/4 - 1/2 mile (0.5 - 1.0 km).
●Install tire chains following the instructions provided with the tire chains.
CAUTION
■Driving with snow tires
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failure to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or
serious injury.
●Use tires of the size specified.
●Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.
●Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of
snow tires being used.
●Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.
321
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
CAUTION
■Driving with tire chains
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failure to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely,
and may cause death or serious injury.
●Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being
used, or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.
●Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.
●Avoid sudden turns and braking, as use of chains may adversely affect
vehicle handling.
●Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle con-
trol is maintained.
NOTICE
■Repairing or replacing snow tires
Request repairs or replacement of snow tires from Toyota dealers or legiti-
mate tire retailers.
This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the opera-
tion of the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.
■Fitting tire chains
The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly
when tire chains are fitted.
322
2-5. Driving information
Trailer towing
Toyota does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle.
Toyota also does not recommend the installation of a tow hitch or
the use of a tow hitch carrier for a wheelchair, scooter, bicycle, etc.
Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing or for the use of tow
hitch mounted carriers.
ITO25P102
323
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
Dinghy towing
NOTICE
■To avoid serious damage to your vehicle
Do not tow your vehicle with the four wheels on the ground.
Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on
the ground) behind a motor home.
ITO25P103
324
2-5. Driving information
Interior features 3
325
3-1. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
Air conditioning
system ........................... 326
Using the steering wheel
climate remote control
switches......................... 337
Solar Ventilation
System........................... 339
Remote Air Conditioning
System........................... 342
Rear window and outside
rear view mirror defogger
switch............................. 346
3-2. Using the audio system
Audio system types.......... 347
Using the AUX port/USB
port................................. 352
3-3. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list............... 353
• Front interior lights ......... 354
• Personal lights ............... 355
• Rear interior light ........... 355
3-4. Using the storage features
List of storage features .... 357
• Glove boxes................... 358
• Console box................... 359
• Cup holders ................... 360
• Bottle holders................. 362
• Auxiliary boxes............... 363
3-5. Other interior features
Sun visors ........................ 364
Vanity mirrors................... 365
Outside temperature
display............................ 366
Power outlets ................... 367
Seat heaters..................... 369
Armrest ............................ 371
Floor mats........................ 372
Luggage compartment
features.......................... 374
Garage door opener......... 380
Safety Connect ................ 388
326
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Air conditioning system
Airflow and outlets are automatically adjusted according to the tem-
perature setting.
Temperature
control button
Temperature
setting display
Air outlet
display
Fan speed
display
Windshield
defogger button
Off
Automatic
mode
Outside air or
recirculated
air mode
Changes the
air outlets used
Fan speed
control button
Outside temperature display (P. 366)
Micro dust and
pollen filter
Cooling and dehumidification
function ON/OFF switch
327
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Using the automatic mode
Press .
The air conditioning system will begin to operate. Air outlets and fan
speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature set-
ting.
Press “▲” to increase the temperature and “▼” to decrease
the temperature on the .
Adjusting the settings
■Changing the cooling and dehumidification function
Press .
The cooling and dehumidification function switches between on and off
each time the button is pressed.
■Adjusting the temperature setting
Press “▲” to increases the temperature and “▼” to decreases the
temperature on the .
■Adjusting the fan speed
Press (increase) or (decrease) on .
The fan speed is shown on the display. (7 levels)
Press to turn the fan off.
STEP
1
STEP
2
328
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■Changing the air outlets
Press .
The air outlets switch each time
the button is pressed.
Air flows to the upper body.
Air flows to the upper body and
feet.
ITO31P105
329
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Mainly air flows to the feet.
Air flows to the feet and the
windshield defogger operates.
■Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Press .
The modes switches between (recycles air inside the vehicle)
and (introduces air from outside the vehicle) modes each time
the button is pressed.
330
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Defogging the windshield
Press .
The air conditioning system con-
trol operates automatically.
Recirculated air mode will auto-
matically switch to outside air
mode.
Micro dust and pollen filter
Press .
Outside air mode switches to recirculated air mode. Pollen is removed
from the air and the air flows to the upper part of the body.
Usually the system will turn off automatically approximately 3 minutes
later.
To stop the operation, press again.
331
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets
■Adjusting the air outlets
Center outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Right and left side outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
332
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■Opening and closing the air outlets
Center outlets
Open the vent.
Close the vent.
Move the knob in the direction of
the printed arrow until a click is
heard.
Right and left side outlets
Open the vent.
Close the vent.
Move the knob in the direction of
the printed arrow until a click is
heard.
333
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
■Using the automatic mode
Fan speed is adjusted automatically in accordance with the temperature set-
ting and ambient conditions. As a result, the following may occur.
●Immediately after is pressed, the fan may stop for a while until
warm or cool air is ready to flow.
●Cool air may flow to the area around the upper body when the heater is
on.
■Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Recirculated air mode or outside air mode may be automatically switched to
in accordance with under these condition, such as temperature setting and
inside temperature.
Also, outside air mode may be automatically switched to when the outside
temperature is low.
■When the outside temperature exceeds 75 F (24 C) and the air condi-
tioning system is on
●In order to reduce the air conditioning power consumption, the air condi-
tioning system may switch to recirculated air mode automatically. This
may also reduce fuel consumption.
●Recirculated air mode is selected as a default mode when the “POWER”
switch is turned to ON mode.
●It is possible to switch to outside air mode at any time by pressing
.
■Using the system in recirculated air mode
The windows will fog up more easily if the recirculated air mode is used.
■Window defogger feature
●Recirculated air mode may automatically switch to outside air mode in
situations where the windows need to be defogged.
●When the outside air temperature is low, it may take a while for the con-
densation to clear from the windshield.
334
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■When is selected for the air outlets used
For your driving comfort, air flowing to the feet may be warmer than air flow-
ing to the upper body depending on the temperature setting.
■Micro dust and pollen filter
●In order to prevent the windows from fogging up when the outside air is
cold, the following may occur.
• Outside air mode does not switch to recirculated air mode.
• The air conditioning system operates automatically.
• The operation cancels after 1 minute.
●In rainy weather, the windows may fog up. Press .
●Condensation may appear on the windows if this mode is used in abnor-
mally high levels of humidity.
●Pollen will be collected by the filter even when micro dust and pollen filter
mode is OFF.
■Maintenance of the air conditioning filter
The air conditioning filter must be cleaned or changed regularly to maintain
air conditioning efficiency according to the maintenance schedule. In dusty
areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement may be required.
(For scheduled maintenance information, refer to the “Owner’s Manual Sup-
plement/ Scheduled Maintenance Guide”.)
When inspecting, cleaning and replacing the air conditioning filter, contact
your Toyota dealer.
335
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
■If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically
The filter may be clogged. Contact your Toyota dealer.
■Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode
In the Eco drive mode, the air conditioning system is controlled as follows to
prioritize fuel efficiency:
●Engine speed and compressor operation controlled to restrict heating/
cooling capacity
●Fan speed restricted when automatic mode is selected
To improve air conditioning performance, perform the following operations:
●Adjust the fan speed
●Turn off Eco drive mode (P. 204)
●Customize the air conditioning control of Eco drive mode. (P. 590)
■When outside air temperature is below 32 °F (0 °C)
The cooling and dehumidification function may not operate even when
is pressed.
■Air conditioning odors
●During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter
into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause
odor to be emitted from the vents.
●To reduce potential odors from occurring:
• It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air
mode prior to turning the vehicle off.
• The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time
immediately after the air conditioning system is started in automatic
mode.
■Customization
Settings (e.g. enable/disable automatic operation of the air conditioning
compressor when the “AUTO” switch ON) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 590)
336
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
CAUTION
■To prevent the windshield from fogging up
Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather.
The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the
windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking
your vision.
NOTICE
■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the
hybrid system is not operating.
337
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Using the steering wheel climate remote control switches
Adjusting the temperature setting
Press “” on to increase the temperature and “” to decrease
the temperature.
Changing the outside air or recirculated air modes
Press .
The mode switches between outside air mode and recirculated air mode
each time the switch is pressed.
Some air conditioning features can be controlled using the switches
on the steering wheel.
Temperature control
Outside air or recirculated
air mode
338
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■When operating the steering switches (vehicles with touch tracer dis-
play)
●The steering switches operation status is displayed on the instrument
cluster for confirmation purposes. (P. 215)
CAUTION
■To reduce the risk of an accident
Exercise care when operating the air conditioning switches on the steering
wheel.
●Settings are shown on the multi-infor-
mation display when the steering switch
is operated.
339
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Solar Ventilation System
: If equipped
The Solar Ventilation System uses energy provided by solar panel
built into the roof to operate a fan contained within the air condition-
ing system, allowing ventilation of the vehicle interior when the vehi-
cle is parked in direct sunlight.
■Activating the Solar Ventilation System
With the “POWER” switch in
ON mode, turn on the ventila-
tion switch.
Off
On
Turn the “POWER” switch off.
After approximately 1 minute, outside air mode will be selected
and the air vents will be put into upper body mode.
After approximately 10 minutes, the ventilation operation will
commence.
The ventilation operation will be canceled if the “POWER”
switch is turned to ON mode or the ventilation switch is turned
off.
STEP
1
STEP
2
340
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■Operating conditions
The Solar Ventilation System may not operate under the following circum-
stances due to a lack of power from the solar panel:
●Low amount of sunlight
●Ever when a part of the solar panel is cast by a shadow.
●Ever when a part of the solar panel is covered by fallen leaves or dirt.
●The solar panel is not at a high temperature.
■Before using the Solar Ventilation System
Remove dirt or fallen leaves from the solar panel in order to ensure sufficient
electrical output.
■Efficient use of the Solar Ventilation System
Efficient control of temperature increase can be achieved by using the sys-
tem in conjunction with the Remote Air Conditioning System. (P. 342)
■When using the Solar Ventilation System
●Make sure that the “POWER” switch is in ON mode when turning the
ventilation switch on. If the ventilation switch is turned on while the
“POWER” switch is OFF, the air mode and the status of the air vents will
remain unchanged.
●If the Solar Ventilation System is not needed, be sure to turn the ventila-
tion switch off.
Dirty air and exhaust fumes from other vehicles may be drawn from out-
side. Also, use in winter may cause heated interior air to leave the vehi-
cle, thus leading to a drop in temperature.
■Sounds when using the Solar Ventilation System
If the amount of sunlight is insufficient, you may hear a sound coming from
the air conditioning system. This is the sound of a control function to pre-
serve the fan and does not indicate a malfunction.
341
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
CAUTION
■Solar Ventilation System precautions
●Do not use the system if people are inside the vehicle.
The Solar Ventilation System is not intended to ensure the performance of
the air conditioning system. Do not leave children or pets in the vehicle.
The temperature of the interior will remain high, possibly resulting in heat-
stroke, dehydration, or even death.
●This system should be used only for the relief of discomfort when entering
the vehicle, and should not be used for other purposes.
■Precautions for moon roof with Solar Panel
P. 129
342
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Remote Air Conditioning System
■Operating conditions
The system will only operate if all of the following conditions are met:
●The shift position is in P.
●The “POWER” switch is OFF.
●All doors are closed.
●The hood is closed.
●The brake pedal is not being depressed.
●The air conditioning is not set to “HI”.
: If equipped
The Remote Air Conditioning System uses electrical energy stored
in the hybrid battery (traction battery) and allows the air conditioning
to be operated by remote control.
■Before leaving the vehicle
Check the temperature setting of the air conditioning system.
The Remote Air Conditioning System will operate in accordance with
the temperature settings of the air conditioning system.
■Activating the Remote Air Conditioning System
Press and hold the to
operate the Remote Air Condi-
tioning System.
The system will shut off if a
door is opened.
The system can be stopped by
pressing the twice.
343
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
■Using the Remote Air Conditioning System effectively
Efficiency can be increased by using the system in conjunction with the
Solar Ventilation System. (P. 339)
■When leaving the vehicle
●Check that the headlights are switched to either off or “AUTO”.
●Check that the wiper switch is turned off.
●Check that all windows are closed.
■Remote Air Conditioning System automatic shut-off
The system will automatically shut off under the following conditions:
●About 3 minutes have passed since operation began
●Any one of the operating conditions is not met
The system may also shut off if the charge level of the hybrid battery (trac-
tion battery) drops to low. (P. 42)
■Conditions affecting operation
The system may not start in the following situations:
●The charge level of the hybrid battery (traction battery) is low (P. 42)
●The air conditioning temperature is set at a high level or outside tempera-
ture is low
●When the vehicle has been left parked for a number of days
●When the hybrid system is cool (for example, after being left for a long
time in low temperatures)
344
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■Security feature
Any unlocked doors will be automatically locked when the system is operat-
ing. The buzzer will beep and the emergency flashers flash when the doors
have been locked or the system has been turned off.
(The doors locked: Once; The system turned off: Twice)
■Conditions affecting operation
P. 72
■Electronic key battery depletion
P. 76
■When the electronic key battery is fully depleted
P. 76
■Customization
Setting (e.g. Operation using the on the wireless remote control) can
be changed.
(Customizable features P. 596)
345
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
CAUTION
■Precautions for the Remote Air Conditioning System
●Do not use the system if people are in the vehicle.
• Even when the system is in use, the internal temperature may still
reach a high level due to features such as the automatic shut-off. Chil-
dren and pets left inside the vehicle may suffer heatstroke or dehydra-
tion, or could result in death or serious injury.
• The wipers can be operated during system operation. Children or pets
left inside the vehicle may mistakenly operate these and cause an acci-
dent.
●Depending on the surrounding environment, signals from the wireless
switch may transmit further than expected. Pay appropriate attention to
the vehicle’s surroundings and use the switch only when necessary.
●Turn the wipers off. If the Remote Air Conditioning System operates while
the wiper switch is in the on position, the wipers may operate and objects
may get caught in the wiper blades.
●Do not operate the if the hood is open. The air conditioning may
operate unintentionally and objects may be drawn into the electrical cool-
ing fan.
NOTICE
■To prevent the hybrid battery (traction battery) from being discharged
through incorrect operation
Use the only when necessary.
346
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defogger switch
■Operating conditions
The “POWER” switch is in ON mode.
■The outside rear view mirror defoggers
Turning the rear window defogger on will turn the outside rear view mirror
defoggers on.
CAUTION
■When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on
Do not touch the outside surface of the rear view mirrors, as they can
become very hot and burn you.
NOTICE
■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Do not leave the rear window defogger on longer than necessary when the
hybrid system is off.
Defoggers are used to defog the rear window, and to remove rain-
drops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors.
Turns the rear window and
outside rear view mirror defog-
gers on/off
The defoggers will automati-
cally turn off after approxi-
mately 15 minutes.
347
3
Interior features
3-2. Using the audio system
Audio system types
Vehicles with Display Audio system
Type A
Type B
Refer to the “Display Audio System Owner’s Manual”.
348
3-2. Using the audio system
Steering wheel audio switches
Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the
steering wheel. For details, refer to the “Display Audio System
Owner’s Manual” or “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
Operation may differ and usage may not be possible with audio/navi-
gation systems that are not compatible with the steering switches in
this vehicle.
Vehicles with a navigation system
Refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
Canada
349
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
■About Bluetooth® (vehicles with Display Audio system)
CAUTION
■Certification for the Display Audio system
FCC ID: ACJ932CQ-US70G0
●Part 15 of the FCC Rules
FCC Warning:
Any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment will void the
user’s authority to operate this device.
●Laser products
• Do not take this unit apart or attempt to make any changes by yourself.
This is an intricate unit that uses a laser pickup to retrieve information
from the surface of compact discs. The laser is carefully shielded so
that its rays remain inside the cabinet. Therefore, never try to disas-
semble the player or alter any of its parts since you may be exposed to
laser rays and dangerous voltages.
• This product utilizes a laser.
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other
than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation expo-
sure.
Bluetooth is a registered trade mark of
Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
The Bluetooth word mark and logos are
owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any
use of such marks by Panasonic Corpo-
ration is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names are
those of their respective owners.
350
3-2. Using the audio system
CAUTION
Properly shielded a grounded cables and connectors must be used for con-
nection to host computer and / or peripherals in order to meet FCC emission
limits.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undes-
ired operation of this device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux la partie 15 des règles de la FCC et
CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1)
l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil
doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est
susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for
an uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Expo-
sure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio fre-
quency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of RF
energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure
evaluation (MPE).
But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated keeping the radia-
tor at least 20 cm or more away from person’s body (excluding extremities:
hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition aux rayonnements
énoncées pour un environnement non contrôlé et respecte les règles les
radioélectriques (RF) de la FCC lignes directices d’exposition dans le Sup-
plément C à OET65 et d’exposition aux fréquences radioélectriques (RF)
CNR-102 de l’IC. Cet équipement émet une énergie RF très faible qui est
considérée conforme sans évaluation de l’exposition maximale autorisée.
Cependant, cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé en gardant une dis-
tance de 20 cm ou plus entre le dispositif rayonnant et le corps (à l’exception
des extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et chivilles).
351
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
CAUTION
Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate
using an antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the
transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to
other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the
equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that neces-
sary for successful communication.
Conformément à la réglementation d’Industrie Canada, le présent émetteur
radio peut fonctionner avec une antenne d’un type et d’un gain maximal (ou
inférieur) approuvé pour l’émetteur par Industrie Canada. Dans le but de
réduire les risques de brouillage radioélectrique à l’intention des autres utili-
sateurs, il faut choisir le type d’antenne et son gain de sorte que la puis-
sance isotrope rayonnée équivalente (p.i.r.e.) ne dépasse pas l’intensité
nécessaire à l’établissement d’une communication satisfaisante.
352
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the AUX port/USB port
■Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system
The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle’s audio controls. All other
adjustments must be made on the portable audio device itself.
■When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet
Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable
audio device.
This port can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen
to it through the vehicle’s speakers.
Open the console box lid. (P. 359)
Connect the portable audio
device.
STEP
1
STEP
2
354
3-3. Using the interior lights
Front interior lights
Type A
Turns the lights off
Turns the door position on
Turns the lights on
Type B
Turns the lights off
Turns the door position on
Turns the lights on
Front interior lights
355
3-3. Using the interior lights
3
Interior features
Personal lights
Type A
Turns the lights on/off
Type B
Turns the lights on/off
Rear interior light
The light will turn on/off in con-
junction with the front interior
lights
Turns the light on
ITO34P111
Personal lights and rear interior light
356
3-3. Using the interior lights
■Illuminated entry system
The lights automatically turn on/off according to “POWER” switch mode, the
presence of the electronic key, whether the doors are locked/unlocked, and
whether the doors are opened/closed.
■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
If the interior lights remain on when the door is not fully closed and the inte-
rior light switch (door position on/off) is on, the lights will go off automatically
after 20 minutes.
■Customization
Setting (e.g. The time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 594)
NOTICE
■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is
off.
Rear interior light
357
3
Interior features
3-4. Using the storage features
List of storage features
CAUTION
■Items that should not be left in the storage spaces
Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this
may cause the following when cabin temperature becomes high:
●Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact
with other stored items.
●Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other
stored items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas,
causing a fire hazard.
Bottle holders
Auxiliary boxes
Glove boxes
Cup holders
Console box
358
3-4. Using the storage features
Glove boxes
Upper glove box
Push the button.
Lower glove box
Push the button.
■Glove box light (lower glove box only)
The glove box light turns on when the tail lights are on.
CAUTION
■While driving
Keep the glove box closed when not in use. In the event of sudden braking
or sudden swerving, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck
by the open glove box or the items stored inside.
Glove boxes
359
3-4. Using the storage features
3
Interior features
Console box
Pull up the lever to release the
lock.
Lift the console box lid to
open.
CAUTION
■While driving
Keep the console box closed when not is use. In the event of sudden brak-
ing or sudden swerving, an accident may occur due to an occupant being
struck by the open console box or the items stored inside.
Console box
360
3-4. Using the storage features
Cup holders
Front (type A)
Lift the lid.
Front (type B)
Rear (if equipped)
Pull down the armrest.
ITO35P113
Cup holders
361
3-4. Using the storage features
3
Interior features
CAUTION
■Items unsuitable for the cup holder
Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of sudden braking,
sudden swerving or an accident and cause injury. If possible, cover hot
drinks to prevent burns.
■When not in use
Keep the cup holders closed.
Injuries may result in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an
accident.
Cup holders
362
3-4. Using the storage features
Bottle holders
ITO35P121
CAUTION
■Items unsuitable for the bottle holder
Do not place anything other than pet bottles in the bottle holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of sudden braking,
sudden swerving or an accident and cause injury.
NOTICE
■Items that should not be stowed in the bottle holders
Put the cap on before stowing a bottle. Do not place open bottles in the bot-
tle holders, or glasses and paper cups containing liquid. The contents may
spill and glasses may break.
Bottle holders
363
3-4. Using the storage features
3
Interior features
Auxiliary boxes
Type A
Type B (if equipped)
Push the lid.
The overhead console is useful
for temporarily storing small
items.
CAUTION
■While driving
Do not leave the overhead console open.
Items may fall out and cause injury.
■Maximum storage weight
Do not place any object heavier than 0.4 lb. (200 g) in it. The console may
be opened and cause injury.
Auxiliary boxes
364
3-5. Other interior features
Sun visors
To set the visor in the for-
ward position, flip it down.
To set the visor in the side
position, flip down, unhook,
and swing it to the side.
ITO36P101
365
3-5. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Vanity mirrors
NOTICE
■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Do not leave the vanity lights on for extended periods while the hybrid sys-
tem is off.
Slide the cover to open.
The light turns on when the
cover is opened.
ITO36P103
366
3-5. Other interior features
Outside temperature display
■Operating conditions
The “POWER” switch is in ON mode.
■Display
In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be dis-
played, or the display may take longer than normal to change.
●When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 16 mph [25 km/h])
●When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/
exit of a garage, tunnel, etc.)
■When -- is displayed
The system may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.
The displayed temperature ranges from -22 °F (-30 °C) up to 122 °F
(50 °C).
367
3-5. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Power outlets
■The power outlets can be used when
The “POWER” switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode.
The power outlets can be used for 12 V accessories that run on less
than 10 A.
Instrument panel
Open the cover.
Rear console box
Open the cover.
368
3-5. Other interior features
NOTICE
■To avoid damaging the power outlets
Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use.
Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short cir-
cuit.
■To prevent blown fuse
Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A.
■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Do not use the power outlets longer than necessary when the hybrid system
is off.
369
3-5. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Seat heaters
: If equipped
■The seat heaters can be used when
The “POWER” switch is in ON mode.
■When not in use
Turn the seat heater off.
Heats the left front seat
Heats the right front seat
The indicator light comes on.
Press the button again to turn off
the seat heater.
The indicator light turns off.
370
3-5. Other interior features
CAUTION
■Burns
●Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat
heater on to avoid the possibility of burns:
• Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physically chal-
lenged
• Persons with sensitive skin
• Persons who are fatigued
• Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping
drugs, cold remedies, etc.)
●Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.
Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature
of the seat and may lead to overheating.
●Do not use the seat heater more than necessary. Doing so may cause
minor burns or overheating.
NOTICE
■To prevent seat heater damage
Do not put heavy objects that have an uneven surface on the seat and do
not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.
■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Turn the seat heaters off when the hybrid system is off.
371
3-5. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Armrest
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the armrest
Do not place too much strain on the armrest.
: If equipped
Pull the armrest down for use.
ITO36P111
372
3-5. Other interior features
Floor mats
Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same
model and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place
onto the carpet.
Insert the retaining hooks
(clips) into the floor mat eye-
lets.
Turn the upper knob of each
retaining hook (clip) to secure
the floor mats in place.
*: Always align the marks.
The shape of the retaining hooks (clips) may differ from that shown in the
illustration.
STEP
1
STEP
2
*
373
3-5. Other interior features
3
Interior features
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause the driver’s floor mat to slip, possibly interfering
with the pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may
become difficult to stop the vehicle, leading to a serious accident.
■When installing the driver’s floor mat
●Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year
vehicles, even if they are Toyota Genuine floor mats.
●Only use floor mats designed for the driver’s seat.
●Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) pro-
vided.
●Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other.
●Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down.
■Before driving
●Check that the floor mat is securely
fixed in the correct place with all the
provided retaining hooks (clips). Be
especially careful to perform this check
after cleaning the floor.
●With the hybrid system stopped and the
shift position in P, fully depress each
pedal to the floor to make sure it does
not interfere with the floor mat.
374
3-5. Other interior features
Luggage compartment features
■Cargo hooks
Raise the hook to use.
The cargo hooks are provided
for securing loose items.
■Deck boards
Center (type A)
When using the auxiliary box,
lift the center deck board.
375
3-5. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Center (type B)
When using the auxiliary box,
turn the knob to the
“UNLOCK” position and open
the lid.
Lift the center deck board to
remove it.
Side
Lift the side deck board to
remove it.
STEP
1
STEP
2
376
3-5. Other interior features
■Auxiliary boxes
Center (type A)
Center (type B)
Side
377
3-5. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Removing the luggage cover
Lift it up.
■Luggage cover (if equipped)
Pull out the luggage cover and
secure it to the hook brackets.
378
3-5. Other interior features
Stowing the luggage cover (vehicles with center auxiliary box
type B only)
Remove the side deck board and
open the center deck board.
Adjust the cover so that “TOP” is
facing up.
Replace the side deck board and the center deck board.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
379
3-5. Other interior features
3
Interior features
CAUTION
■When the cargo hooks are not in use
To avoid injury, always return the cargo hooks to their stowed positions.
■Caution while driving
Keep the lid of each storage spaces closed while driving. In the event of sud-
den braking or sudden swerving, an accident may occur due to an occupant
being struck by an open auxiliary box or the items stored inside.
■Caution for the luggage cover
●Do not allow children to climb on the luggage cover. Climbing on the lug-
gage cover could result in damage to the luggage cover, possibly causing
death or serious injury to the child.
●Make sure that the rear edge of the cover is laying flat. If the cover is
installed with the rear edge raised, the view from the rear window may be
obstructed, which could cause an accident.
●Make sure that seat belts are not caught up in the luggage cover. If a seat
belt is caught up in the cover, it may not be able to restrain passengers
properly.
380
3-5. Other interior features
Garage door opener
The garage door opener (HomeLink® Universal Transceiver) is manufac-
tured under license from HomeLink®.
Programming the HomeLink® (for U.S.A. owners)
The HomeLink® compatible transceiver in your vehicle has 3 buttons
which can be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the
programming method below appropriate for the device.
Buttons
Indicator light
: If equipped
The garage door opener can be programmed to operate garage
doors, gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, secu-
rity systems, and other devices.
381
3-5. Other interior features
3
Interior features
■Programming HomeLink®
Point the remote control trans-
mitter for the device 1 to 3 in. (25
to 75 mm) from the HomeLink®
buttons.
Keep the HomeLink® indicator
light in view while programming.
Press and hold one of the
HomeLink® buttons and the
transmitter button. When the
HomeLink® indicator light
changes from a slow to a rapid
flash, you can release both but-
tons.
If the HomeLink® indicator light
comes on but does not flash, or
flashes rapidly for 2 seconds and
remains lit, the HomeLink® button
is already programmed. Use the
other buttons or follow the
“Reprogramming a HomeLink®
button” instructions. (P. 385)
STEP
1
STEP
2
382
3-5. Other interior features
Test the HomeLink® operation by
pressing the newly programmed
button.
If a HomeLink® button has been
programmed for a garage door,
check to see if the garage door
opens and closes. If the garage
door does not operate, see if your
garage transmitter is of the rolling
code type. Press and hold the
programmed HomeLink® button.
The remote control transmitter is
of the rolling code type if the
HomeLink®indicator light flashes
rapidly for 2 seconds and then
remains lit. If your transmitter is
the rolling code type, proceed to
the heading “Programming a roll-
ing code system”.
Repeat the steps above to program another device for any of
the remaining HomeLink® buttons.
STEP
3
STEP
4
383
3-5. Other interior features
3
Interior features
■Programming a rolling code system (for U.S.A. owners)
If your device is rolling code equipped, follow the steps under the
heading “Programming HomeLink®” before proceeding with the
steps listed below.
Locate the training button on the ceiling mounted garage door
opener motor. The exact location and color of the button may
vary by brand of garage door opener motor.
Refer to the operation manual supplied with the garage door opener
for the location of the training button.
Press the training button.
Following this step, you have 30 seconds in which to initiate step 3
below.
Press and hold the vehicle’s programmed HomeLink® button
for 2 seconds and release it. Repeat this step once again. The
garage door may open.
If the garage door opens, the programming process is complete. If
the door does not open, press and hold the button a third time, and
release after 2 seconds. This third press and release will complete
the programming process by opening the garage door.
The ceiling mounted garage door opener motor should now recog-
nize the HomeLink® signal and operate the garage door.
Repeat the steps above to program another rolling code sys-
tem for any of the remaining HomeLink® buttons.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
384
3-5. Other interior features
■Programming an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)/Programming
a devices in the Canadian market
Place the remote control transmitter 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm)
away from the HomeLink® buttons.
Keep the HomeLink® indicator light in view while programming.
Press and hold the selected HomeLink® button.
Repeatedly press and release (cycle) the remote control
transmitter for 2 seconds each until step 4 is completed.
When the HomeLink® indicator light starts to flash rapidly,
release the buttons.
Test the HomeLink® operation by pressing the newly pro-
grammed button. Check to see if the gate/device operates
correctly.
Repeat the steps above to program another device for any of
the remaining HomeLink® buttons.
■Programming other devices
To program other devices such as home security systems, home
door locks and lighting, contact your Toyota dealer for assistance.
■Reprogramming a button
The individual HomeLink® buttons cannot be erased but can be
reprogrammed. To reprogram a button, follow the “Reprogramming
a HomeLink® button” instructions.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
6
385
3-5. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Operating HomeLink®
Press the appropriate HomeLink® button. The HomeLink® indicator
light should come on.
The HomeLink® compatible transceiver in your vehicle continues to send
a signal for up to 20 seconds as long as the button is pressed.
Reprogramming a HomeLink® button
Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button. After 20 seconds, the
HomeLink® indicator light will start flashing slowly. Keep pressing the
HomeLink® button and press and hold the transmitter button until the
HomeLink® indicator light changes from a slow to a rapid flash.
Release the buttons.
Erasing the entire HomeLink® memory (all three programs)
Press and hold the 2 outside but-
tons for 10 seconds until the indi-
cator light flashes.
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to
erase the programs stored in the
HomeLink® memory.
386
3-5. Other interior features
■Before programming
●Install a new battery in the remote control transmitter.
●The battery side of the remote control transmitter must be pointed away
from the HomeLink® button.
■Certification for the garage door opener
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: NZLOBIHL4
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
IC ID: 4112A-OBIHL4
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
■When support is necessary
Visit on the web at www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.
387
3-5. Other interior features
3
Interior features
CAUTION
■When programming a garage door or other remote control device
The garage door or other device may operate, so ensure people and objects
are out of danger to prevent potential harm.
■Conforming to federal safety standards
Do not use the HomeLink® compatible transceiver with any garage door
opener or device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by
federal safety standards.
This includes any garage door that cannot detect an interfering object. A
door or device without these features increases the risk of death or serious
injury.
388
3-5. Other interior features
Safety Connect
: If equipped
Safety Connect is a subscription-based telematics service that uses
Global Positioning System (GPS) data and embedded cellular tech-
nology to provide safety and security features to subscribers. Safety
Connect is supported by Toyota’s designated response center,
which operates 24 hours per day, 7 days per week.
Safety Connect service is available by subscription on select,
telematics hardware-equipped vehicles.
By using the Safety Connect service, you are agreeing to be bound
by the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and its Terms and
Conditions, as in effect and amended from time to time, a current
copy of which is available at Toyota.com. All use of the Safety Con-
nect service is subject to such then-applicable Terms and Condi-
tions.
■System components
LED light indicators
“SOS” button
Microphone
389
3-5. Other interior features
3
Interior features
■Services
Subscribers have the following Safety Connect services avail-
able:
●Automatic Collision Notification*
Helps drivers receive necessary response from emergency
service providers. (P. 391)
*: U.S. Patent No. 7,508,298 B2
●Stolen Vehicle Location
Helps drivers in the event of vehicle theft. (P. 392)
●Emergency Assistance Button (SOS)
Connects drivers to response-center support. (P. 392)
●Enhanced Roadside Assistance
Provides drivers various on-road assistance. (P. 392)
■Subscription
After you have signed the Telematics Subscription Service
Agreement and are enrolled, you can begin receiving services.
A variety of subscription terms is available for purchase. Contact
your Toyota dealer, call 1-800-25-TOYOTA (1-800-255-3987) or
push the “SOS” button in your vehicle for further subscription
details.
390
3-5. Other interior features
■Safety Connect Services Information
●Phone calls using the vehicles Bluetooth® technology will not be possible
during Safety Connect.
●Safety Connect is available beginning Fall 2009 on select Toyota models.
Contact with the Safety Connect response center is dependent upon the
telematics device being in operative condition, cellular connection avail-
ability, and GPS satellite signal reception, which can limit the ability to
reach the response center or receive emergency service support. Enroll-
ment and Telematics Subscription Service Agreement required. A variety
of subscription terms is available; charges vary by subscription term
selected.
●Automatic Collision Notification, Emergency Assistance, Stolen Vehicle
Location, and Enhanced Roadside Assistance will function in the United
States, including Hawaii and Alaska, and in Canada. No Safety Connect
services will function outside of the United States in countries other than
Canada.
●Safety Connect services are not subject to section 255 of the Telecom-
munications Act and the device is not TTY compatible.
■Languages
The Safety Connect response center will offer support in multiple languages.
The Safety Connect system will offer voice prompts in English and Spanish.
Please indicate your language of choice when enrolling.
■When contacting the response center
You may be unable to contact the response center if the network is busy.
■Safety Connect backup battery depletion
An exclusive backup battery is built in to assist the Automatic Collision Noti-
fication, which is activated when impact above a certain level is applied to
the vehicle, or when the airbags operate. This battery is a primary battery,
and cannot be recharged. The red LED indicator will flash to indicate that the
battery should be replaced.
The backup battery will need to be replaced if the Automatic Collision
Notification operates for 60 seconds or more. For replacement, consult your
Toyota dealer.
391
3-5. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Safety Connect LED light Indicators
When the “POWER” switch is turned to ON mode, the red indicator
light comes on for 2 seconds then turns off. Afterward, the green indi-
cator light comes on, indicating that the service is active.
The following indicator light patterns indicate specific system usage
conditions:
●Green indicator light on = Active service
●Green indicator light flashing = Safety Connect call in process
●Red indicator light (except at vehicle start-up) = System malfunc-
tion (contact your Toyota dealer)
●No indicator light (off) = Safety Connect service not active
Safety Connect services
■Automatic Collision Notification
In case of either airbag deployment or severe rear-end collision,
the system is designed to automatically call the response center.
The responding agent receives the vehicle’s location and attempts
to speak with the vehicle occupants to assess the level of emer-
gency. If the occupants are unable to communicate, the agent
automatically treats the call as an emergency, contacts the nearest
emergency services provider to describe the situation, and
requests that assistance be sent to the location.
392
3-5. Other interior features
■Stolen Vehicle Location
If your vehicle is stolen, Safety Connect can work with local author-
ities to assist them in locating and recovering the vehicle. After fil-
ing a police report, call the Safety Connect response center at 1-
800-25-TOYOTA (1-800-255-3987) and follow the prompts for
Safety Connect to initiate this service.
In addition to assisting law enforcement with recovery of a stolen
vehicle, Safety-Connect-equipped vehicle location data may, under
certain circumstances, be shared with third parties to locate your
vehicle. Further information is available at Toyota.com.
■Emergency Assistance Button (“SOS”)
In the event of an emergency on the road, push the “SOS” button
to reach the Safety Connect response center. The answering
agent will determine your vehicle’s location, assess the emer-
gency, and dispatch the necessary assistance required.
If you accidentally press the “SOS” button, tell the response-center agent
that you are not experiencing an emergency.
■Enhanced Roadside Assistance
Enhanced Roadside Assistance adds GPS data to the already
included warranty-based Toyota roadside service.
Subscribers can press the “SOS” button to reach a Safety Connect
response-center agent, who can help with a wide range of needs,
such as: towing, flat tire, fuel delivery, etc. For a description of the
Roadside Assistance services and their limitations, please see the
Safety Connect Terms and Conditions, which are available at
Toyota.com.
393
3-5. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Safety information for Safety Connect
Important! Read this information before using Safety Connect.
■Exposure to radio frequency signals
The Safety Connect system installed in your vehicle is a low-power
radio transmitter and receiver. It receives and also sends out radio
frequency (RF) signals.
In August 1996, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
adopted RF exposure guidelines with safety levels for mobile wire-
less phones. Those guidelines are consistent with the safety stan-
dards previously set by the following U.S. and international
standards bodies.
●ANSI (American National Standards Institute) C95.1 [1992]
●NCRP (National Council on Radiation Protection and Measure-
ment) Report 86 [1986]
●ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation
Protection) [1996]
Those standards were based on comprehensive and periodic eval-
uations of the relevant scientific literature. Over 120 scientists,
engineers, and physicians from universities, and government
health agencies and industries reviewed the available body of
research to develop the ANSI Standard (C95.1).
The design of Safety Connect complies with the FCC guidelines in
addition to those standards.
394
3-5. Other interior features
■Certification for Safety Connect
FCC ID: O9EGTM1
FCC ID: O6Y-CDMRF101
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Maintenance and care 4
395
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior......... 396
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior.......... 399
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance
requirements.................. 402
General maintenance....... 405
Emission inspection and
maintenance (I/M)
programs........................ 409
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions .................... 410
Hood ................................ 413
Positioning a floor jack..... 416
Engine compartment........ 419
12-volt battery .................. 431
Tires................................. 437
Tire inflation pressure ...... 447
Wheels............................. 451
Electronic key battery....... 454
Checking and replacing
fuses .............................. 456
Light bulbs........................ 467
396
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior
■Automatic car washes
●Fold the mirrors and remove the antenna before washing the vehicle.
Start washing from the front of the vehicle. Make sure to re-install the
antenna and extend the mirrors before driving.
●Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface
and harm your vehicle’s paint.
●Roof antenna, rear spoiler may not be washable in some automatic car
washes. There may also be an increased risk of damage to vehicle.
■High pressure car washes
●Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity
of the windows.
●Before using the car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle
is closed properly.
Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime
condition:
●Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle
body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any
dirt and dust.
●Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a
chamois.
●For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thor-
oughly with water.
●Wipe away any water.
●Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.
If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle
body is cool.
397
4-1. Maintenance and care
4
Maintenance and care
■When using a car wash
If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effec-
tive range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. Place the key in a posi-
tion 6 ft. (2 m) or more separate from the vehicle while the vehicle is being
washed. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)
■Aluminum wheels
●Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use
hard brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical
cleaners.
Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint.
●Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, for example after
driving for long distance in the hot weather.
●Wash detergent from the wheels immediately after use.
■Bumpers
Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.
CAUTION
■When washing the vehicle
Do not apply water to the inside of the engine compartment. Doing so may
cause the electrical components etc. to catch fire.
■Precautions regarding the exhaust pipe
Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipe to become quite hot.
When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipe until it has cooled
sufficiently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns.
398
4-1. Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and compo-
nents (aluminum wheels etc.)
●Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:
• After driving near the sea coast
• After driving on salted roads
• If coal tar or tree sap is present on the paint surface
• If dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings are present on the
paint surface
• After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust,
iron powder or chemical substances
• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled with dust or mud
• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface
●If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.
●To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place
with low humidity when storing the wheels.
■Cleaning the exterior lights
●Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.
This may damage the surfaces of the lights.
●Do not apply wax to the surfaces of the lights.
Wax may cause damage to the lenses.
■Antenna installation and removal precautions
●Before driving, ensure that the antenna is installed.
●When the antenna is removed, such as before entering an automatic car
wash, make sure to store it in a suitable place so as not to lose it. Also,
before driving, make sure to reinstall the antenna in its original position.
399
4-1. Maintenance and care
4
Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior
The following procedures will help protect your vehicle’s interior and
keep it in top condition:
■Protecting the vehicle interior
Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty sur-
faces with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.
■Cleaning the leather areas
●Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
●Wipe off any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened
with diluted detergent.
Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool deter-
gent.
●Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly
wipe off all remaining traces of detergent.
●Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remain-
ing moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded and venti-
lated area.
■Cleaning the synthetic leather areas
●Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner.
●Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather using a
sponge or soft cloth.
●Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the
dirt and wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth.
400
4-1. Maintenance and care
■Caring for leather areas
Toyota recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year
to maintain the quality of the vehicle’s interior.
■Shampooing the carpets
There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a
sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not use
water. Wipe dirty surfaces and let them dry. Excellent results are obtained by
keeping the carpet as dry as possible.
■Seat belts
Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also
check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
CAUTION
■Water in the vehicle
●Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle, such as on the floor, in the
hybrid battery (traction battery) air vents, and in the luggage compartment.
Doing so may cause the hybrid battery (traction battery), electrical compo-
nents, etc. to malfunction or catch fire.
●Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.
(P. 142)
An electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function
properly, resulting in death or serious injury.
■Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel)
Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect off
the windshield, obstructing the driver’s view and leading to an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
401
4-1. Maintenance and care
4
Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■Cleaning detergents
●Do not use the following types of detergent, as they may discolor the vehi-
cle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces:
• Non-seat portions: Organic substances such as benzene or gasoline,
alkaline or acidic solutions, dye, and bleach
• Seats: Alkaline or acidic solutions, such as thinner, benzene, and alcohol
●Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel’s or other
interior part’s painted surface may be damaged.
■Preventing damage to leather surfaces
Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of
leather surfaces:
●Remove any dust or dirt from leather surfaces immediately.
●Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time.
Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.
●Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or containing wax on the uphol-
stery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats
up significantly.
■Water on the floor
Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.
Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes
into contact with electrical components such as the audio system above or
under the floor of the vehicle. Water may also cause the body to rust.
■Cleaning the inside of the rear window
●Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause
damage to the rear window defogger heater wires. Use a cloth dampened
with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in
strokes running parallel to the heater wires.
●Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires.
402
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements
■Repair and replacement
It is recommended that genuine Toyota parts be used for repairs to ensure
performance of each system. If non-Toyota parts are used in replacement or
if a repair shop other than a Toyota dealer performs repairs, confirm the war-
ranty coverage.
To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular
maintenance are essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform
regular checks. Toyota recommends performing the following main-
tenance:
■General maintenance
General maintenance should be performed on a daily basis.
This can be done by yourself or by a Toyota dealer.
■Scheduled maintenance
Scheduled maintenance should be performed at specified inter-
vals according to the maintenance schedule.
For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the
“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
■Do-it-yourself maintenance
You can perform some maintenance procedures by yourself.
Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect war-
ranty coverage.
The use of Toyota repair manuals is recommended.
For details about warranty coverage, refer to the separate “Owner’s
Warranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
403
4-2. Maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Reset the maintenance data (U.S.A. only)
After the required maintenance is performed according to the maintenance
schedule, please reset the maintenance data.
To reset the data, follow the procedures described below:
Turn the “POWER” switch off with the trip meter A shown.
Turn the “POWER” switch to ON mode with the MPH or km/h button
(P. 216) held down.
Keep pressing the button until the trip meter indicates “000000” and
the multi-information display indicates that the reset is complete.
■Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Toyota dealer
●Toyota technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date
with the latest service information. They are well informed about the
operation of all systems on your vehicle.
●Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has
been performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise
while your vehicle is under warranty, your Toyota dealer will promptly
take care of it.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
404
4-2. Maintenance
CAUTION
■If your vehicle is not properly maintained
Improper maintenance could result in serious damage to the vehicle and
possible serious injury or death.
■Handling of the 12-volt battery
●Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile
components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a
well ventilated area.
●Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by
component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of Califor-
nia to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid
exposure and wash any affected area immediately.
●12-volt battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and
lead compounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your
hands after handling. (P. 431)
405
4-2. Maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
General maintenance
Engine compartment
Items Check points
Brake fluid Is the brake fluid at the correct
level? (P. 427)
Engine/power control unit coolant
Is the engine/power control unit
coolant at the correct level?
(P. 424)
Engine oil Is the engine oil at the correct
level? (P. 420)
Exhaust system There should not be any fumes or
strange sounds.
Radiator/condenser
The radiator and condenser
should be free from foreign
objects. (P. 426)
Washer fluid Is there sufficient washer fluid?
(P. 429)
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be per-
formed at the intervals specified in the “Owner’s Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement/Scheduled
Maintenance Guide”. It is recommended that any problem you notice
should be brought to the attention of your Toyota dealer or qualified
service shop for advice.
406
4-2. Maintenance
Luggage compartment
Vehicle interior
Items Check points
12-volt battery Check the connections. (P. 431)
Items Check points
Accelerator pedal
• The accelerator pedal should
move smoothly (without uneven
pedal effort or catching).
Hybrid transmission “Park” mech-
anism
• When parked on a slope and the
shift position is in P, is the vehicle
securely stopped?
Brake pedal
• Does the brake pedal move
smoothly?
• Does the brake pedal have appro-
priate clearance from the floor?
(P. 568)
• Does the brake pedal have the
correct amount of free play?
(P. 568)
Brakes
• The vehicle should not pull to one
side when the brakes are applied.
• The brakes should work effec-
tively.
• The brake pedal should not feel
spongy.
• The brake pedal should not get
too close to the floor when the
brakes are applied.
407
4-2. Maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Head restraints • Do the head restraints move
smoothly and lock securely?
Indicators/buzzers • Do the indicators and buzzers
function properly?
Lights • Do all the lights come on?
Parking brake
• Does the parking brake pedal
move smoothly?
• When parked on a slope and the
parking brake is on, is the vehicle
securely stopped?
Seat belts
• Do the seat belts operate
smoothly?
• The seat belts should not be dam-
aged.
Seats • Do the seat controls operate
properly?
Steering wheel
• Does the steering wheel rotate
smoothly?
• Does the steering wheel have the
correct amount of free play?
• There should not be any strange
sounds coming from the steering
wheel.
Items Check points
408
4-2. Maintenance
Vehicle exterior
Items Check points
Doors • Do the doors operate smoothly?
Engine hood • Does the engine hood lock sys-
tem work properly?
Fluid leaks
• There should not be any signs of
fluid leakage after the vehicle has
been parked.
Tires
• Is the tire inflation pressure cor-
rect?
• The tires should not be dam-
aged or excessively worn.
• Have the tires been rotated
according to the maintenance
schedule?
• The wheel nuts should not be
loose.
CAUTION
■If the hybrid system is operating
Turn the hybrid system off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation
before performing maintenance checks.
409
4-2. Maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs
Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which
include OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system moni-
tors the operation of the emission control system.
■If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere
in the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/
M test and may need to be repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer
to service the vehicle.
■Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test in the following situa-
tions:
●When the 12-volt battery is disconnected or discharged
Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are
erased.
Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes
may not be completely set.
●When the fuel tank cap is loose
The malfunction indicator lamp comes on indicating a tempo-
rary malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.
■When the malfunction indicator lamp still remains on after
several driving trips
The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the
vehicle is driven 40 or more times.
■If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test
Contact your Toyota dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.
410
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service precautions
If you perform maintenance by yourself, be sure to follow the correct
procedure as given in these sections.
Items Parts and tools
12-volt battery condition
(P. 431)
• Grease
• Conventional wrench
(for terminal clamp bolts)
Brake fluid level (P. 427)
• FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE
J1703 brake fluid
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding
brake fluid)
Engine/power control unit coolant
level (P. 424)
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
or a similar high quality ethylene
glycol-based non-silicate, non-
amine, non-nitrite and non-borate
coolant with long-life hybrid
organic acid technology
For the U.S.A.:
“Toyota Super Long Life Cool-
ant” is pre-mixed with 50% cool-
ant and 50% deionized water.
For Canada:
“Toyota Super Long Life Cool-
ant” is pre-mixed with 55% cool-
ant and 45% deionized water.
• Funnel (used only for adding cool-
ant)
411
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Items Parts and tools
Engine oil level (P. 420)
• “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or
equivalent
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding
engine oil)
Fuses (P. 456) • Fuse with same amperage rating
as original
Light bulbs (P. 467)
• Bulb with same number and watt-
age rating as original
• Phillips-head screwdriver
• Flathead screwdriver
• Wrench
Radiator and condenser
(P. 426)
Tire inflation pressure (P. 447) • Tire pressure gauge
• Compressed air source
Washer fluid (P. 429)
• Water or washer fluid containing
antifreeze (for winter use)
• Funnel (used only for adding
water or washer fluid)
412
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may
move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death
or serious injury, observe the following precautions.
■When working on the engine compartment
●Make sure that the indicator on the “POWER” switch and the “READY”
indicator are both off.
●Keep hands, clothing and tools away from the moving fan.
●Be careful not to touch the engine, power control unit, radiator, exhaust
manifold, etc. right after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids
may also be hot.
●Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper and rags, in the
engine compartment.
●Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel. Fuel fumes
are flammable.
■When working near the electric cooling fans or radiator grille
Be sure the “POWER” switch is off.
With the “POWER” switch in ON mode, the electric cooling fans may auto-
matically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant tempera-
ture is high. (P. 426)
■Safety glasses
Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from
getting in your eyes.
NOTICE
■If you remove the air cleaner filter
Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear
due to dirt in the air. Also, a backfire could cause a fire in the engine com-
partment.
413
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Hood
Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.
Pull the hood lock release
lever.
The hood will pop up slightly.
Pull up the auxiliary catch
lever and lift the hood.
STEP
1
STEP
2
414
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■Pre-driving check
Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.
If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion
and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.
■After installing the support rod into the slot
Make sure the rod supports the hood securely from falling down on to your
head or body.
Hold the hood open by insert-
ing the supporting rod into
either of the slots.
Use the forward slot to open
the hood normally, or use the
rearward slot when the hood
needs to be opened wide.
STEP
3
415
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■When closing the hood
Be sure to return the support rod to its clip before closing the hood. Closing
the hood without returning the support rod properly could cause the hood to
bend.
416
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Positioning a floor jack
When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack cor-
rectly. Improper placement (such as under rear suspension etc.) may
damage your vehicle or cause injury.
■Front
■Rear
ITO43P106
417
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
■When raising your vehicle
Make sure to observe the following precautions to reduce the possibility of
death or serious injury:
●When using a floor jack, follow the instructions of the manual provided with
the jack.
●Do not use the jack that was supplied with your vehicle.
●Do not put any part of your body underneath the vehicle when it is sup-
ported only by the floor jack.
●Always use floor jack and/or automotive jack stands on a solid, flat, level
surface.
●Do not start the hybrid system while the vehicle is supported by the floor
jack.
●Stop the vehicle on level, firm ground, firmly set the parking brake and shift
the shift position to P.
●Make sure to set the floor jack properly at the jack point.
Raising the vehicle with an improperly positioned floor jack will damage
the vehicle and may cause the vehicle to fall off the floor jack.
●Lift up the vehicle using a floor jack
such as the one shown in the illustra-
tion.
418
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
●Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in the vehicle.
●When raising the vehicle, do not place any object on top of or underneath
the floor jack.
●When raising the vehicle, do not set the
floor jack under the rear suspension.
ITO43P206
Rear suspension
Front
419
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Engine compartment
■12-volt battery
P. 431
Engine coolant reservoir
(P. 424)
Engine oil level dipstick
(P. 420)
Engine oil filler cap
(P. 420)
Power control unit coolant
reservoir (P. 424)
Brake fluid reservoir
(P. 427)
Fuse box (P. 456)
Radiator (P. 426)
Condenser (P. 426)
Electric cooling fans
Washer fluid tank (P. 429)
420
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine oil
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil
level on the dipstick.
■Checking the engine oil
Park the vehicle on level ground. After warming up the engine
and turning off the hybrid system, wait more than 5 minutes
for the oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine.
Holding a rag under the end, pull
the dipstick out.
Wipe the dipstick clean.
Reinsert the dipstick fully.
Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check
the oil level.
Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.
Low
Full
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
6
ITO43P108
421
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Adding engine oil
If the oil level is below or near
the low level mark, add engine
oil of the same type as that
already in the engine.
Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before
adding oil.
Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise.
Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.
Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise.
Engine oil selection P. 564
Oil quantity
(Low Full) 1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 Imp.qt.)
Items Clean funnel
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
422
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Engine oil consumption
●The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the oil viscosity, the
quality of the oil and the way the vehicle is driven.
●More oil is consumed under driving conditions such as high speeds and
frequent acceleration and deceleration.
●A new engine consumes more oil.
●When judging the amount of oil consumption, keep in mind that the oil
may have become diluted, making it difficult to judge the true level accu-
rately.
●Oil consumption: Max. 1.1 qt./600 miles (1.0 L/1000 km, 0.9 Imp.qt./
600 miles)
●If your vehicle consumes more than 1.1 qt. (1.0 L, 0.9 Imp.qt.) every
600 miles (1000 km), contact your Toyota dealer.
423
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
■Used engine oil
●Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may
cause skin disorders such as inflammation and skin cancer, so care
should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used
engine oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.
●Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do
not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the
ground. Call your Toyota dealer, service station or auto parts store for
information concerning recycling or disposal.
●Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.
NOTICE
■To prevent serious engine damage
Check the oil level on a regular basis.
■When replacing the engine oil
●Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.
●Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.
●Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.
●Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.
424
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Coolant
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the full (“FULL” or “F”)
and low (“LOW” or “L”) lines on the reservoir when the hybrid system
is cold.
Engine coolant reservoir
Reservoir cap
“FULL” line
“LOW” line
If the level is on or below the
“LOW” line, add coolant up to the
“FULL” line. (P. 566)
Power control unit coolant reservoir
Reservoir cap
“F” line
“L” line
If the level is on or below the “L”
line, add coolant up to the “F” line.
(P. 566)
ITO43P111
425
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Coolant selection
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or a similar high quality ethylene
glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant
with long-life hybrid organic acid technology.
U.S.A.: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% cool-
ant and 50% deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -31 F
[-35 C])
Canada: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% cool-
ant and 45% deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -44 F
[-42 C])
For more details about coolant, contact your Toyota dealer.
■If the coolant level drops within a short time of replenishing
Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine/power control unit coolant reser-
voir caps, drain cock and water pump.
If you cannot find a leak, have your Toyota dealer test the cap and check for
leaks in the cooling system.
CAUTION
■When the hybrid system is hot
Do not remove the engine/power control unit coolant reservoir caps.
The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the
cap is removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns.
426
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Radiator and condenser
Check the radiator and condenser and clear away any foreign
objects.
If either of the above parts is extremely dirty or you are not sure of
their condition, have your vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
NOTICE
■When adding coolant
Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of
water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion
protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.
■If you spill coolant
Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damaging parts or paint.
CAUTION
■When the hybrid system is hot
Do not touch the radiator or condenser as they may be hot and cause seri-
ous injuries, such as burns.
427
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Brake fluid
■Checking fluid level
The brake fluid level should be
between the “MAX” and “MIN”
lines on the tank.
■Adding fluid
Push the tab in and lift the cover
off.
Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary item.
ITO43P151
ITO43P152
Fluid type FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid
Items Clean funnel
428
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air
Excess moisture in the brake fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking
efficiency. Use only newly opened brake fluid.
CAUTION
■When filling the reservoir
Take care as brake fluid can harm your hands and eyes and damage painted
surfaces.
If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean
water immediately.
If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.
NOTICE
■If the fluid level is low or high
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads
wear out or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, there may be a serious problem.
429
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Washer fluid
Open the lid.
Check the washer fluid level on
the level gauge.
“NORMAL”
“LOW”
If the washer fluid level is at
“LOW”, add washer fluid.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
430
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■When adding washer fluid
Do not add washer fluid when the hybrid system is hot or operating as
washer fluid contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc.
NOTICE
■Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid
Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.
Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces.
■Diluting washer fluid
Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.
Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the washer fluid bot-
tle.
431
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
12-volt battery
■Location
The 12-volt battery is located
in the right-hand side of lug-
gage compartment.
■Removing the 12-volt battery cover
Open the center deck board. (P. 374)
Remove the center auxiliary box. (P. 376)
Remove the side deck board
and 12-volt battery cover.
Remove the 12-volt battery
maintenance cover.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
432
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Before recharging
When recharging, the 12-volt battery produces hydrogen gas which is flam-
mable and explosive. Therefore, observe the following precautions before
recharging:
●If recharging with the 12-volt battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to
disconnect the ground cable.
●Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and
disconnecting the charger cables to the 12-volt battery.
■Exterior
Make sure that the 12-volt battery terminals are not corroded
and that there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose
clamps.
Terminals
Hold-down clamp
433
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■After recharging/reconnecting the 12-volt battery
●Unlocking the doors using the smart key system may not be possible
immediately after reconnecting the 12-volt battery. If this happens, use
the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock/unlock the
doors.
●Start the hybrid system with the “POWER” switch in ACCESSORY mode.
The hybrid system may not start with the “POWER” switch turned off.
However, the hybrid system will operate normally from the second
attempt.
●The “POWER” switch mode is recorded by the vehicle. If the 12-volt bat-
tery is reconnected, the vehicle will return the “POWER” switch mode to
the status it was in before the 12-volt battery was disconnected. Make
sure to turn off the power before disconnect the 12-volt battery. Take
extra care when connecting the 12-volt battery if the “POWER” switch
mode prior to discharge is unknown.
●Restart the hybrid system, depress the brake pedal, and confirm that it is
possible to shift into each shift position.
If the system will not start even after multiple attempts at all methods above,
contact your Toyota dealer.
434
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■Chemicals in the 12-volt battery
The 12-volt battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may
produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk
of death or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or
near the 12-volt battery:
●Do not cause sparks by touching the 12-volt battery terminals with tools.
●Do not smoke or light a match near the 12-volt battery.
●Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.
●Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
●Wear protective safety glasses when working near the 12-volt battery.
●Keep children away from the 12-volt battery.
■Where to safely charge the 12-volt battery
Always charge the 12-volt battery in an open area. Do not charge the 12-volt
battery in a garage or closed room where there is insufficient ventilation.
■How to recharge the 12-volt battery
Only perform a slow charge (5 A or less). The 12-volt battery may explode if
charged at a quicker rate.
435
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
■Emergency measures regarding electrolyte
●If electrolyte gets in your eyes
Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immedi-
ate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or
cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility.
●If electrolyte gets on your skin
Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical
attention immediately.
●If electrolyte gets on your clothes
It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the cloth-
ing and follow the procedure above if necessary.
●If you accidentally swallow electrolyte
Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention
immediately.
■When replacing the 12-volt battery
Use a 12-volt battery designed for this vehicle. Failure to do so may cause
gas (hydrogen) to enter the passenger compartment, causing a fire or explo-
sion.
For replacement of the 12-volt battery, contact your Toyota dealer.
436
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■When disconnecting the 12-volt battery
NOTICE
■When recharging the 12-volt battery
Never recharge the 12-volt battery while the hybrid system is operating.
Also, be sure all accessories are turned off.
Do not disconnect the negative (-) termi-
nal on the body side as shown. The dis-
connected negative (-) terminal may
touch the positive (+) terminal, which may
cause a short and result in death or seri-
ous injury.
437
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Tires
Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance sched-
ules and treadwear.
■Checking tires
New tread
Treadwear indicator
Worn tread
The location of treadwear
indicators is shown by the
“TWI” or “” marks, etc.,
molded on the sidewall of
each tire.
Check spare tire condition
and pressure if not rotated.
■Tire rotation
Rotate the tires in the order
shown.
To equalize tire wear and
extend tire life, Toyota recom-
mends that tire rotation is
carried out at the same inter-
val as tire inspection.
Do not fail to initialize the tire
pressure warning system
after tire rotation.
ITO43P115
Front
438
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters must also be installed.
When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are
installed, new ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure warn-
ing computer and the tire pressure warning system must be initial-
ized. Have tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes
registered by your Toyota dealer. (P. 440)
■Tire pressure warning system
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure warning system
that uses tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect
low tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise.
(P. 499)
The compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter.
439
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Initializing the tire pressure warning system
■The tire pressure warning system must be initialized in the fol-
lowing circumstances:
●When rotating front and rear tires which have different tire infla-
tion pressures
●When changing the tire size
When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current
tire inflation pressure is set as the benchmark pressure.
■How to initialize the tire pressure warning system
Park the vehicle in a safe place and turn the “POWER” switch
off.
Initialization cannot be performed while the vehicle is moving.
Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire infla-
tion pressure level. (P. 569)
Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire
inflation pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will
operate based on this pressure level.
Turn the “POWER” switch to ON mode.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
440
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Press and hold the tire pressure
warning reset switch until the tire
pressure warning light blinks
slowly 3 times.
Wait for a few minutes with the “POWER” switch in ON mode
and then turn the “POWER” switch off.
Registering ID codes
The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is equipped with a
unique ID code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID code. Have the ID code
registered by your Toyota dealer.
STEP
4
STEP
5
441
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■When to replace your vehicle’s tires
Tires should be replaced if:
●You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to
expose the fabric, and bulges indicating internal damage.
●A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the
size or location of a cut or other damage.
If you are not sure, consult with your Toyota dealer.
■Replacing tires and wheels
If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not
registered, the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After
driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light blinks for
1 minute and stays on to indicate a system malfunction.
■Tire life
Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even
if it has seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.
■Routine tire inflation pressure checks
The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation
pressure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of
your routine of daily vehicle checks.
■Low profile tires (vehicles with 17-inch tires)
Generally, low profile tires will wear more rapidly and tire grip perfor-
mance will be reduced on snowy and/or icy roads when compared to
standard tires. Be sure to use snow tires or tire chains on snowy and/or
icy roads and drive carefully at a speed appropriate for road and weather
conditions.
442
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Maximum load of tire
Check that the maximum load of the replacement tire is greater than 1/2
of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the
rear axle, whichever is greater.
■Tire types
●Summer tires
Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway
driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same
traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for
driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered
roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is recommended. When
installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.
●All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to
be adequate for driving in most winter conditions as well as for use
year-round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction
performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also,
all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance
compared with summer tires in highway driving.
●Snow tires
For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using
snow tires. If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, con-
struction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your
vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow
tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without
first checking local regulations for possible restrictions. Snow tires
should be installed on all wheels. (P. 317)
For the GAWR, see the Certification
Label. For the maximum load of the
tire, see the load limit at maximum cold
tire inflation pressure mentioned on the
sidewall of the tire. (P. 575)
443
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Initializing the tire pressure warning system
Initialize the system with the tire inflation pressure adjusted to the speci-
fied level.
■If the tread on snow tires wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm)
The effectiveness of the tires as snow tires is lost.
■If you press the tire pressure warning reset switch accidentally
If initialization is performed, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the speci-
fied level and initialize the tire pressure warning system again.
■When initialization of the tire pressure warning system has failed
Initialization can be completed in a few minutes. However, in the follow-
ing cases, the settings have not been recorded and the system will not
operate properly. If repeated attempts to record tire inflation pressure
settings are unsuccessful, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
●When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pres-
sure warning light does not blink 3 times.
●After carrying out the initialization procedure, the tire pressure warn-
ing light blinks for 1 minute then stays on after driving for 20 minutes.
444
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Tire pressure warning system certification
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
MODEL/FCC IDs:
Transmitter: PAXPMV107J
Receiver: HYQ13BDE
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsi-
ble for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equip-
ment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) this device may
not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
445
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
■When inspecting or replacing tires
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.
Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train as well as
dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.
●Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns.
Also, do not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear.
●Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Toyota.
●Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply
tires).
●Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires.
●Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle.
Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously.
■When initializing the tire pressure warning system
Do not operate the tire pressure warning reset switch without first adjust-
ing the tire inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire
pressure warning light may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure
is low, or it may come on when the tire inflation pressure is actually nor-
mal.
446
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves,
transmitters and tire valve caps
●When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pres-
sure warning valves and transmitters may be damaged if not handled
correctly.
●When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than
those specified. The cap may become stuck.
■To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmit-
ters
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is
used, contact your Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop as soon
as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter when replacing the tire. (P. 438)
■Driving on rough roads
Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or pot-
holes.
These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing
the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition, driving on rough roads may
cause damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels
and body.
■Low profile tires (vehicles with 17-inch tires)
Low profile tires may cause greater damage than usual to the wheel
when receiving impact from the road surface. Therefore pay attention to
the following:
●Be sure to use proper tire inflation pressure. If tires are under-inflated,
they may be damaged more severely.
●Avoid pot holes, uneven pavement, curbs and other road hazards.
Failure to do so can lead to severe tire and wheel damage.
■If tire inflation pressure of each tire becomes low while driving
Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.
448
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
.
■Inspection and adjustment procedure
Tire valve
Tire pressure gauge
Remove the tire valve cap.
Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.
Read the pressure using the gauge gradations.
If the tire inflation pressure is not at the recommended
level, adjust the pressure.
If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to
deflate.
After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement
and adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check
for leakage.
Put the tire valve cap back on.
ITO43P117
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
6
449
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Tire inflation pressure check interval
You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least
once a month.
Do not forget to check the spare.
■Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure
Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:
●Reduced fuel efficiency
●Reduced driving comfort and tire life
●Reduced safety
●Damage to the drive train
If a tire needs frequent inflating, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.
■Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure
When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:
●Check only when the tires are cold.
If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or has not been
driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold
tire inflation pressure reading.
●Always use a tire pressure gauge.
The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire infla-
tion pressure that is even just a few pounds off can affect ride quality
and handling.
●Do not reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal for tire
inflation pressure to be higher after driving.
●Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.
Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle
is balanced.
450
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance
Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following conditions
may occur and result in an accident causing death or serious injury:
●Excessive wear
●Uneven wear
●Poor handling
●Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires
●Poor sealing of the tire bead
●Wheel deformation and/or tire separation
●A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards
NOTICE
■When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure
Be sure to put the tire valve caps back on.
Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and
cause air leakage, which could result in an accident. If the caps are lost,
replace them as soon as possible.
451
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Wheels
If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be
replaced. Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or
cause a loss of handling control.
■Wheel selection
When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that
they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter,
rim width and inset*.
Replacement wheels are available at your Toyota dealer.
*: Conventionally referred to as “offset”.
Toyota does not recommend using the following:
●Wheels of different sizes or types
●Used wheels
●Bent wheels that have been straightened
■Aluminum wheel precautions
●Use only Toyota wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use
with your aluminum wheels.
●When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the
wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).
●Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using
tire chains.
●Use only Toyota genuine balance weights or equivalent and a
plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.
452
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■When replacing wheels
The wheels of your vehicle are equipped with tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to
provide advance warning in the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure.
Whenever wheels are replaced, tire pressure warning valves and trans-
mitters must be installed. (P. 438)
CAUTION
■When replacing wheels
●Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in
the Owner’s Manual, as this may result in a loss of handling control.
●Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a
tubeless tire. Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or seri-
ous injury.
■When installing the wheel nuts
●Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened,
leading to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can
cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing an
accident and resulting in death or serious injury. Remove any oil or
grease from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
●Be sure to install the wheel nuts with
the tapered ends facing inward.
Installing the nuts with the tapered
ends facing outward can cause the
wheel to break and eventually cause
the wheel to come off while driving,
which could lead to an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.
ITI41P007
Tapered
portion
453
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
■Use of defective wheels prohibited
Do not use cracked or deformed wheels.
Doing so could cause the tire to leak air during driving, possibly causing
an accident.
NOTICE
■Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
●Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warn-
ing valves and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your
Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to
purchase your tire pressure warning valves and transmitters at your
Toyota dealer.
●Ensure that only genuine Toyota wheels are used on your vehicle.
Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly
with non-genuine wheels.
454
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Electronic key battery
Replace the battery with a new one if it is depleted.
■You will need the following items:
●Flathead screwdriver
●Lithium battery CR1632
■Replacing the battery
Take out the mechanical key.
Remove the cover.
To prevent damage, cover the
tip of the screwdriver with a
rag.
Remove the depleted battery.
Insert a new battery with the
“+” terminal facing up.
When installing, reverse the steps listed.
STEP
1
STEP
2
ITO43P194
STEP
3
STEP
4
455
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Use a CR1632 lithium battery
●Batteries can be purchased at your Toyota dealer, local electrical appli-
ance shops or camera stores.
●Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the
manufacturer.
●Dispose of used batteries according to local laws.
■If the electronic key battery is depleted
The following symptoms may occur:
●The smart key system and wireless remote control will not function prop-
erly.
●The operational range will be reduced.
CAUTION
■Removed battery and other parts
Keep away from children. These parts are small and if swallowed by a child,
they can cause choking. Failure to do so could result in death or serious
injury.
NOTICE
■For normal operation after replacing the battery
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents:
●Always work with dry hands.
Moisture may cause the battery to rust.
●Do not touch or move any other component inside the remote control.
●Do not bend either of the battery terminals.
456
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Checking and replacing fuses
If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have
blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.
Turn the “POWER” switch off.
Vehicles with Solar Ventilation System: Turn the Solar Ventilation
System off and make sure not to operate the Remote Air Condi-
tioning System.
Open the fuse box cover.
Engine compartment
Push the tab in and lift the lid
off.
When closing, first hook the lid
onto the two rear tabs.
Left side instrument panel
Remove the lid.
After a system failure, see “Fuse layout and amperage rat-
ings” (P. 459) for details about which fuse to check.
STEP
1
STEP
2
ITO43P127
STEP
3
457
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Remove the fuse.
Only type A fuse can be
removed using the pullout
tool.
Check if the fuse is blown.
Type A
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace the blown fuse with a
new fuse of an appropriate
amperage rating. The amper-
age rating can be found on the
fuse box lid.
STEP
4
STEP
5
12
ITY42C012
458
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Type B
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace the blown fuse with a
new fuse of an appropriate
amperage rating. The amper-
age rating can be found on the
fuse box lid.
Type C
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace the blown fuse with a
new fuse of an appropriate
amperage rating. The amper-
age rating can be found on the
fuse box lid.
ITO43P161
459
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Fuse layout and amperage ratings
■Engine compartment
FUSE Ampere Circuit
1 HTR 50A Air conditioning system
2 RDI 30A Electric cooling fans
3 CDS 30A Electric cooling fans
4 S-HORN 10A No circuit
5 ENG W/P 30A Cooling system
6ABS MAIN
NO.2 7.5A Anti-lock brake system
7 H-LP CLN 30A Headlight cleaner
8 P-CON MTR 30A P position control system, trans-
mission
9 AMP NO.1 30A Audio system
10 IGCT 30A PCU, IGCT NO.2, IGCT NO.3
11 DC/DC-S 5A Inverter and converter
12 P CON MAIN 7.5A P position control system, P posi-
tion switch
460
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
FUSE Ampere Circuit
13 AM2 7.5A Power management system
14 ECU-B2 7.5A Smart key system, hybrid system
15 MAYDAY 10A MAYDAY
16 ECU-B3 10A Air conditioning system
17 TURN & HAZ 10A Turn signal lights
18 ETCS 10A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system
19 ABS MAIN
NO.1 20A Anti-lock brake system
20 H-LP LH LO 15A Left-hand headlight (low beam)
21 P/I 2 40A
P position control system, horn,
headlight low beams, back-up
lights
22 ABS MTR 1 30A Anti-lock brake system
23 ABS MTR 2 30A Anti-lock brake system
24 H-LP HI MAIN 20A Headlight high beams, daytime
running lights
25 DRL 7.5A Daytime running lights
26 AMP NO.2 30A Audio system, navigation system
27 P/I 1 60A IG2, EFI MAIN, BATT FAN
28 EPS 60A Electric power steering
29 H-LP RH LO 15A Right-hand headlight (low beam)
30 PCU 10A Inverter and converter
31 IGCT NO.2 10A
Hybrid system, P position control
system, power management sys-
tem, multiport fuel injection sys-
tem/sequential multiport fuel
injection system
461
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
FUSE Ampere Circuit
32 MIR HTR 10A Outside rear view mirror defoggers
33 RAD NO.1 15A Audio system, navigation system
34 DOME 10A
Door courtesy lights, luggage
compartment light, personal light,
interior light, foot lights, vanity
lights, inside rear view mirror,
garage door opener
35 ECU-B 7.5A
Smart key system, personal lights,
gauges and meters, emergency
flashers
36 H-LP LH HI 10A Left-hand headlight (high beam)
37 H-LP RH HI 10A Right-hand headlight (high beam)
38 EFI NO.2 10A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system
39 IGCT NO.3 10A Cooling system
40 SPARE 30A Spare fuse
41 SPARE 10A Spare fuse
42 SPARE 7.5A Spare fuse
43 EFI MAIN 20A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system, cooling system, EFI NO.2
44 BATT FAN 10A Battery cooling fan
45 IG2 20A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system, MET, IGN, power man-
agement system
462
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Left side instrument panel
FUSE Ampere Circuit
1 CIG 15A Power outlets
2 ECU-ACC 10A
Multiplex communication system,
outside rear view mirrors, driver
support system, audio system,
navigation system, advanced
parking guidance system, head-up
display
3 PWR OUTLET 15A Power outlets
4 SEAT HTR FR 10A Seat heater
5 SEAT HTR FL 10A Seat heater
6 DOOR NO.1 25A Power door lock system
7 PSB 30A Pre-Collision System
8 PWR SEAT FR 30A Front passenger’s seat
9 DBL LOCK 25A No circuit
10 FR FOG 7.5A Front fog lights
11 PWR SEAT FL 30A Driver’s seat
12 OBD 7.5A On-board diagnosis system
13 RR FOG 7.5A No circuit
14 STOP 10A
Stop lights, high mounted stop-
light, brake system, driver support
system, vehicle proximity notifica-
tion system
ITO43P133
123456 78910
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
20 21 22
463
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
FUSE Ampere Circuit
15 P FR DOOR 25A Power windows
16 D FR DOOR 25A Power windows
17 DOOR RR 25A Power windows
18 DOOR RL 25A Power windows
19 S/ROOF 30A Moon roof
20 ECU-IG NO.1 10A
Electric cooling fans, multiplex
communication system, vehicle
proximity notification system
21 ECU-IG NO.2 10A
Driver support system, Pre-Colli-
sion System, LKA system, inside
rear view mirror, garage door
opener, yaw rate & G sensor,
brake system, electric power
steering, navigation system, moon
roof, tire pressure warning system,
seat belt pretensioners, audio sys-
tem, emergency flashers, turn sig-
nal lights, windshield wipers,
headlight cleaner
22 GAUGE 10A
Headlight leveling system, gauges
and meters, emergency flashers,
turn signal lights
23 A/C 10A
Air conditioning system, Solar
Ventilation System, Remote Air
Conditioning System
24 WASHER 15A Windshield washer
464
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
FUSE Ampere Circuit
25 RR WIP 20A Rear window wiper and washer
26 WIP 30A Windshield wipers
27 MET 7.5A Gauges and meters
28 IGN 10A
Brake system, driver support sys-
tem, multiport fuel injection sys-
tem/sequential multiport fuel
injection system, SRS airbag sys-
tem, front passenger occupant
classification system (ECU and
sensors), power management sys-
tem, smart key system, front pas-
senger’s seat belt reminder light
29 PANEL 10A
Air conditioning system, personal
light, transmission, P position
switch, navigation system, Solar
Ventilation System, Remote Air
Conditioning System, advanced
parking guidance system, head-
light cleaner, front passenger’s
seat belt reminder light, headlight
leveling system, glove box light,
clock, audio system, MPH or km/h
switch
30 TAIL 10A
Headlight leveling system, park-
ing lights, tail lights, license plate
lights, front fog lights, side marker
lights
465
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■After a fuse is replaced
●If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb
may need replacement. (P. 467)
●If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
■If there is an overload in a circuit
The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage.
■When replacing light bulbs
Toyota recommends that you use genuine Toyota products designed for this
vehicle. Because certain bulbs are connected to circuits designed to prevent
overload, non-genuine parts or parts not designed for this vehicle may be
unusable.
CAUTION
■To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause damage, and possibly a fire or injury.
●Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than that indicated, or use
any other object in place of a fuse.
●Always use a genuine Toyota fuse or equivalent.
Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.
This can cause extensive damage or even fire.
●Do not modify the fuses or fuse boxes.
■Fuse box near the power control unit
Never check or replace the fuses as there are high voltage parts and wiring
near the fuse box.
Doing so may cause electric shock, resulting in death or serious injury.
466
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■Before replacing fuses
Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your
Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
467
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Light bulbs
You may replace the following bulbs by yourself. The difficulty level
of replacement varies depending on the bulb. As there is a danger
that components may be damaged, we recommend that replacement
is carried out by your Toyota dealer.
■Preparing for light bulb replacement
Check the wattage of the light bulb to be replaced. (P. 570)
■Front bulb locations
Front side
marker light
Headlight low beam (halogen headlights)
Headlight high beam
(including daytime running
lights for Canada)
Fog light
Front turn
signal light
Parking light
(halogen headlights)
468
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Replacing light bulbs
■Headlight low beams (halogen headlights)
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
■Rear bulb locations
Rear turn signal light
Back-up light License plate lights
STEP
1
469
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Unplug the connector while
pressing the lock release.
Replace the light bulb, and install
the bulb base.
Align the 3 tabs on the light bulb
with the mounting, and insert.
Turn and secure the bulb base.
Shake the bulb base gently to
check that it is not loose, turn the
headlights on once and visually
confirm that no light is leaking
through the mounting.
ITO43P163
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
470
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Headlight high beams (including daytime running lights for
Canada)
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
Vehicles with halogen headlights
Vehicles with LED headlights
Unplug the connector while
pressing the lock release.
STEP
1
ITO43P165
STEP
2
471
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Replace the light bulb, and install
the bulb base.
Align the 3 tabs on the light bulb
with the mounting, and insert.
Turn and secure the bulb base.
Shake the bulb base gently to
check that it is not loose, turn the
headlights on once and visually
confirm that no light is leaking
through the mounting.
STEP
3
STEP
4
472
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Parking lights (halogen headlights)
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Remove the light bulb.
When installing, reverse the steps listed.
STEP
1
ITO43P167
STEP
2
STEP
3
473
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Front side marker lights
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
Vehicles with halogen headlights
Vehicles with LED headlights
Remove the light bulb.
When installing, reverse the steps listed.
STEP
1
ITO43P167
STEP
2
STEP
3
474
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Fog lights (if equipped)
Remove the engine under cover
bolt and clip and pull down the
engine under cover.
Unplug the connector while
pressing the lock release.
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
475
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
When installing, reverse the steps listed.
After installing the bulb base, shake the bulb base gently to check
that it is not loose.
Insert the clip.
STEP
4
477
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
For Canada
sTurn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Remove the light bulb.
When installing, reverse the steps listed.
Insert the clip.
STEP
2
ITO43P144
STEP
3
STEP
4
478
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Rear turn signal lights and back-up lights
Open the back door and remove
the cover.
To prevent damage, cover the tip
of the screwdriver with a rag.
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Rear turn signal light
Back-up light
Remove the light bulb.
Rear turn signal light
Back-up light
When installing, reverse the steps listed.
STEP
1
STEP
2
ITO43P147
STEP
3
STEP
4
479
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■License plate lights
Open the back door and remove
the cover.
To prevent damage, cover the tip
of the screwdriver with a rag.
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Remove the light bulb.
When installing, reverse the steps listed.
STEP
1
ITO43P149
STEP
2
ITO43P150
STEP
3
STEP
4
480
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Replacing the following bulbs
If any of the lights listed below has burnt out, have it replaced by
your Toyota dealer.
●Headlight low beams (LED headlights)
●Parking lights (LED headlights)
●Stop lights
●Tail lights
●High mounted stoplight
●Daytime running lights (except for Canada)
■LED lights
The headlight low beams (LED headlights), parking lights (LED headlights),
stop lights, tail lights, high mounted stoplight and daytime running lights
(except for Canada) consist of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn
out, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer to have the light replaced.
■Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens
Contact your Toyota dealer for more information in the following situations.
Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does
not indicate a malfunction.
●Large drops of water have built up on the inside of the lens.
●Water has built up inside the headlight.
■When replacing light bulbs
P. 465
481
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
■Replacing light bulbs
●Be sure to stop the hybrid system and turn off the lights. Do not attempt to
replace the bulb immediately after turning off the lights.
The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.
●Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. Hold the
bulb by the plastic or metal portion.
If the bulb is scratched or dropped, it may blow out or crack.
●Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failure to do so
may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This
may damage the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.
■To prevent damage or fire
Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.
482
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
When trouble arises 5
483
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers ......... 484
If your vehicle needs to
be towed ........................ 485
If you think something
is wrong ......................... 492
5-2. Steps to take in an
emergency
If a warning light turns
on or a warning buzzer
sounds ........................... 493
If a warning message
is displayed .................... 507
If you have a flat tire......... 523
If the hybrid system will
not start.......................... 538
If you lose your keys ........ 540
If the electronic key does
not operate properly....... 541
If the 12-volt battery is
discharged ..................... 543
If your vehicle
overheats ....................... 549
If the vehicle becomes
stuck .............................. 554
If your vehicle has to be
stopped in an
emergency..................... 556
484
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers
■Emergency flashers
If the emergency flashers are used for a long time while the hybrid system is
not operating (while the “READY” indicator is not illuminated), the 12-volt
battery may discharge.
The emergency flashers are used to warn other drivers when the
vehicle has to be stopped in the road due to a breakdown, etc.
Press the switch.
All the turn signal lights will
flash.
To turn them off, press the
switch once again.
5
When trouble arises
485
5-1. Essential information
If your vehicle needs to be towed
Before towing
The following may indicate a problem with your hybrid transmission.
Contact your Toyota dealer before towing.
●The hybrid system is operating but the vehicle will not move.
●The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.
If there is a malfunction in the P position control system, the smart
key system or the immobilizer system, or if the 12-volt battery is dis-
charged, the vehicle cannot be towed with the front wheels on the
ground, as the front wheels may be locked. In this case, transport the
vehicle with both front wheels or all four wheels lifted.
If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by
your Toyota dealer or a commercial towing service, using a lift-type
truck or flat bed truck.
Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/pro-
vincial and local laws.
486
5-1. Essential information
Emergency towing
If a tow truck is not available in
an emergency, your vehicle may
be temporarily towed using a
cable or chain secured to the
emergency towing eyelet(s).
This should only be attempted
on hard surfaced roads for short
distances at under 18 mph
(30 km/h).
A driver must be in the vehicle to
steer and operate the brakes.
The vehicle’s wheels, drive train,
axles, steering and brakes must
be in good condition.
5
When trouble arises
487
5-1. Essential information
Installing towing eyelets
Remove the eyelet cover using a
flathead screwdriver.
To prevent damage, cover the tip
of the screwdriver with a rag.
Insert the towing eyelet into the
hole and tighten partially by
hand.
Tighten down the towing eyelet
securely using a wheel nut
wrench.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
488
5-1. Essential information
Towing with a sling-type truck
Do not tow with a sling-type truck
to prevent body damage.
Towing with a wheel-lift type truck
From the front
Release the parking brake.
From the rear
Use a towing dolly under the
front wheels.
ITO51P103
ITO51P104
ITO51P105
5
When trouble arises
489
5-1. Essential information
Using a flat bed truck
If you use chains or cables to tie
down your vehicle, the angles
shaded in black must be 45.
Do not overly tighten the tie
downs or the vehicle may be
damaged.
ITO51P106
■Before emergency towing
Turn the “POWER” switch to ON mode.
Do not turn the “POWER” switch to ACCESSORY mode.
Shift the shift position to N.
Release the parking brake.
■Emergency towing eyelet location
P. 523
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
490
5-1. Essential information
CAUTION
■Caution while towing
●Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle.
Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which place excessive
stress on the emergency towing eyelets and the cables or chains. Always
be cautious of the surroundings and other vehicles while towing.
●Do not turn the “POWER” switch off.
This may lead to an accident as the front wheels will be locked by the
parking lock.
●If the hybrid system is off, the power assist for the brakes and steering will
not function, making steering and braking more difficult.
■Installing towing eyelets to the vehicle
Make sure that towing eyelets are installed securely.
If not securely installed, towing eyelets may come loose during towing. This
may lead to accidents that cause serious injury or even death.
5
When trouble arises
491
5-1. Essential information
NOTICE
■To prevent damaging the vehicle
When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at
the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the
vehicle could be damaged while being towed.
■To prevent causing serious damage to the hybrid transmission when
towing using a wheel-lift type truck
Never tow this vehicle from the front with the rear wheels on the ground.
■To prevent body damage when towing with a sling-type truck
Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.
■To prevent causing serious damage to the hybrid transmission in
emergency towing
Never tow a vehicle from the rear with four wheels on the ground. This may
cause serious damage to the hybrid transmission.
492
5-1. Essential information
If you think something is wrong
If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably
needs adjustment or repair. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible.
■Visible symptoms
●Fluid leaks under the vehicle
(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)
●Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear
●High engine coolant temperature warning light flashes or
comes on
■Audible symptoms
●Changes in exhaust sound
●Excessive tire squeal when cornering
●Strange noises related to the suspension system
●Pinging or other noises related to the hybrid system
■Operational symptoms
●Engine missing, stumbling or running roughly
●Appreciable loss of power
●Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking
●Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road
●Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost
touches the floor
5
When trouble arises
493
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds
Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle
may be dangerous.
The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake sys-
tem. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your
Toyota dealer.
*: Parking brake engaged warning buzzer:
A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is driven at a speed of approximately 3 mph
(5 km/h) or more.
Warning light Warning light/Details
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Brake system warning light and warning buzzer (red
indicator)*
• Low brake fluid
• Malfunction in the brake system
This light also comes on when the parking brake is not
released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is
fully released, the system is operating normally.
Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights
comes on or flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but then goes
off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system.
However, if this continues to occur, have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
494
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Stop the vehicle immediately.
The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the vehi-
cle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a
safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.
Warning light Warning light/Details
Charging system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system
High coolant temperature warning light
Indicates that the coolant temperature is too high
Changes from a flashing to a solid light when the engine
coolant temperature increases.
5
When trouble arises
495
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
Failure to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to
the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
Warning light Warning light/Details
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Malfunction indicator lamp
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The hybrid system;
• The electronic engine control system; or
• The electronic throttle control system
SRS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The SRS airbag system;
• The front passenger occupant classification system; or
• The seat belt pretensioner system
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
ABS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The ABS; or
• The brake assist system
Electric power steering system warning light (warn-
ing buzzer)
Indicates a malfunction in the EPS system
496
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning light Warning light/Details
(Flashes)
(If equipped)
Pre-collision system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the pre-collision system
The warning light will operate as follows, even when the
system is not malfunctioning:
• The light will flash quickly when the system is operating.
(P. 303)
• The light will turn on when the pre-collision braking is
disabled. (P. 304)
• The light will turn on when the system cannot tempo-
rarily be used. (P. 512)
(Turns on)
Slip indicator light
Indicates a malfunction in:
•VSC;
• TRAC; or
• Hill-start assist control
Flashes when the above systems and/or ABS are oper-
ating.
(P. 297)
(Flashes)
(If equipped)
LKA indicator light
Indicates a malfunction in the LKA. (P. 286)
Brake system warning light (yellow indicator)
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The regenerative braking system; or
• The electronically controlled brake system
5
When trouble arises
497
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning light Warning light/Details
(If equipped)
Automatic headlight leveling system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the automatic headlight level-
ing system
(Flashes)
(If equipped)
Cruise control indicator
Indicates a malfunction in the cruise control/dynamic
radar cruise control
(Flashes)
(If equipped)
Radar cruise control indicator
Indicates a malfunction in the dynamic radar cruise con-
trol
498
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Follow the correction procedures.
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem,
check that the warning light goes off.
Warning light Warning light/Details Correction
procedure
Open door warning light
(warning buzzer)*1
Indicates that a door is
not fully closed
Check that all the
doors are closed.
Low fuel level warning
light
Indicates remaining fuel
is approximately 1.6 gal.
(6.0 L, 1.3 Imp.gal.) or
less
Refuel the vehicle.
Driver’s seat belt
reminder light (warning
buzzer)*2
Warns the driver to fasten
his/her seat belts.
Fasten the seat
belt.
(On the instrument panel)
Front passenger’s seat
belt reminder light
(warning buzzer)*2
Warns the front passen-
ger to fasten his/her seat
belt.
Fasten the seat
belt.
5
When trouble arises
499
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning light Warning light/Details Correction
procedure
Tire pressure warning
light
When the light comes
on:
Low tire inflation pres-
sure such as
• Natural causes
(P. 501)
• Flat tire (P. 523)
Adjust the tire
inflation pressure
to the specified
level.
The light will turn
off after a few
minutes. In case
the light does
not turn off even
if the tire infla-
tion pressure is
adjusted, have
the system
checked by your
Toyota dealer.
When the light comes
on after blinking for 1
minute:
Malfunction in the tire
pressure warning sys-
tem
(P. 503)
Have the system
checked by your
Toyota dealer.
Master warning light
The warning light comes
on and flashes to indicate
that the master warning
system has detected a
malfunction.
P. 507
500
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
*1: Open door warning buzzer:
The open door warning buzzer sounds to alert one or more of the doors is
not fully closed (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]).
*2: Seat belt warning buzzer:
The driver’s and front passenger’s seat belts reminder sounds to alert the
driver and front passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The
buzzer sounds intermittently for 10 seconds after the vehicle has reached a
speed of at least 12 mph (20 km/h). Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened,
the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds.
■SRS warning light
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front impact
sensors, side impact sensors (front), side impact sensors (rear), driver’s seat
position sensor, driver’s seat belt buckle switch, front passenger occupant
classification system (ECU and sensors), “AIR BAG ON” indicator light, “AIR
BAG OFF” indicator light, front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch, seat belt
pretensioner assemblies, airbags, interconnecting wiring and power
sources. (P. 140)
■Front passenger occupant classification system (ECU and sensors),
seat belt reminder and warning buzzer
●If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger
occupant classification system (ECU and sensors) may cause the warn-
ing light to flash and the warning buzzer to sound even if a passenger is
not sitting in the seat.
●If a cushion is placed on the seat, the front passenger occupant classifi-
cation system (ECU and sensors) may not detect a passenger, and the
warning light may not operate properly.
5
When trouble arises
501
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■Electric power steering system warning light
When the 12-volt battery charge becomes insufficient or the voltage tempo-
rarily drops, the electric power steering system warning light may come on.
■If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving
First check the following:
●Is the fuel tank cap loose?
If it is, tighten it securely.
The malfunction indicator lamp will go off after several driving trips.
If the malfunction indicator lamp does not go off even after several trips, con-
tact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
■When the tire pressure warning light comes on
Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level.
Pushing the tire pressure warning reset switch will not turn off the tire
pressure warning light.
■The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes
The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes such
as natural air leaks and tire inflation pressure changes caused by tem-
perature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the
warning light (after a few minutes).
■When a tire is replaced with a spare tire
The compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will
not turn off even though the flat tire has been replaced with the spare
tire. Replace the spare tire with the repaired tire and adjust the tire infla-
tion pressure. The tire pressure warning light will go off after a few min-
utes.
502
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■If the tire pressure warning system is not functioning
The tire pressure warning system will be disabled in the following condi-
tions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
●If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmit-
ters are used
●If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is
not registered in the tire pressure warning computer
●If the tire inflation pressure is 73 psi (500 kPa, 5.1 kgf/cm2 or bar) or
higher
The tire pressure warning system may be disabled in the following condi-
tions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
●If electronic devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies
are nearby
●If a radio set at a similar frequency is in use in the vehicle
●If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed
●If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, particularly around the
wheels or wheel housings
●If non-genuine Toyota wheels are used (Even if you use Toyota
wheels, the tire pressure warning system may not work properly with
some types of tires.)
●If tire chains are used
5
When trouble arises
503
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking
for 1 minute
If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1
minute when the “POWER” switch is turned to ON mode, have it
checked by your Toyota dealer.
■Customization
The vehicle speed linked seat belt reminder buzzer can be disabled.
(Customizable features P. 590) However, Toyota recommends that the
seat belt reminder buzzer be operational to alert the driver and front passen-
ger when seat belts are not fastened.
CAUTION
■If both the ABS and the brake system warning lights remain on
Stop your vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact your Toyota
dealer. The vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking, and the
ABS system may fail, which could cause an accident resulting in death or
serious injury.
■When the electric power steering system warning light comes on
The steering wheel may become extremely heavy.
If the steering wheel becomes heavier than usual when operating, hold
firmly and operate using more force than usual.
504
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■If the tire pressure warning light comes on
Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could
cause a loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.
●Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire
inflation pressure immediately.
●If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pres-
sure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires.
If a tire is flat, change it with the spare tire and have the flat tire
repaired by the nearest Toyota dealer.
●Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate,
you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.
■If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur
The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.
■Maintenance of the tires
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the
vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label (tire and load information label). (If your vehicle has tires of a differ-
ent size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label [tire and load information label], you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
5
When trouble arises
505
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a sub-
stitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire
pressure warning light).
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning
system) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operat-
ing properly. The TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indi-
cator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure
warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illumi-
nated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illumi-
nated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended.
506
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a vari-
ety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires
or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning
system) from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pres-
sure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alter-
nate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) to
continue to function properly.
NOTICE
■Precaution when installing a different tire
When a tire of a different specification or maker is installed, the tire pres-
sure warning system may not operate properly.
5
When trouble arises
507
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning message is displayed
If a warning is shown on the multi-information display, stay calm and
perform the following actions:
Master warning light
Multi-information display
The master warning light also
comes on or flashes in order to
indicate that a message is cur-
rently being displayed on the
multi-information display.
If any of the warning light turns on again after performing the fol-
lowing actions, contact your Toyota dealer.
508
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Stop the vehicle immediately.
A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-infor-
mation display. The following warnings indicate the possibility of dam-
age to the vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the
vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.
Warning message Details
Indicates an abnormal engine oil pressure.
The warning light may turn on if the engine oil pres-
sure is too low.
Indicates a malfunction in the hybrid system.
5
When trouble arises
509
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Have the vehicle inspected immediately.
Failure to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to
the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
Warning message Details
(If equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the LED headlight system.
Indicates a malfunction in the P position control sys-
tem.
In this situation, there is a possibility that the parking
lock mechanism will not work.
When parking, park the vehicle on a flat surface and
apply the parking brake securely. Also, it may not be
possible to turn the “POWER” switch off. If this hap-
pens, applying the parking brake will enable the
switch to be turned off.
(Flashes)
(If equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the pre-collision system.
A buzzer also sounds.
510
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message Details
(Flashes)
(If equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the radar cruise control sys-
tem.
A buzzer also sounds.
Press the “ON-OFF” button once to deactivate the
system, and then press the button again to reacti-
vate the system.
(Flashes)
(If equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the LKA.
A buzzer also sounds.
5
When trouble arises
511
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Follow the correction procedures.
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem,
check that the warning message turns off.
*: Refer to the separate “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual
Supplement” for the maintenance interval applicable to your vehicle.
Warning message Details Correction
procedure
(U.S.A. only)
Indicates that all maintenance
according to the driven dis-
tance on the maintenance
schedule* should be per-
formed soon. If necessary, per-
form maintenance.
Comes on approximately 4500
miles (7200 km) after the main-
tenance data has been reset.
(U.S.A. only)
Indicates that all maintenance
is required to correspond to
the driven distance on the
maintenance schedule*.
Perform the neces-
sary maintenance.
Please reset the
maintenance data
after the mainte-
nance is per-
formed. (P. 403)
Comes on approximately 5000
miles (8000 km) after the main-
tenance data has been reset.
(The indicator will not work
properly unless the mainte-
nance data has been reset.)
512
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message Details Correction
procedure
(If equipped)
• Indicates that the pre-collision
system is not currently func-
tional because the grille or the
sensor is dirty.
• This message also appears
when the pre-collision system
is not functional due to over-
heating.
• Check the grille
and the sensor and
clean them if they
are dirty.
• In case of over-
heating, the system
will become func-
tional once the sys-
tem cools down.
(Flashes)
(If equipped)
Indicates that the radar cruise
control sensor is dirty or cov-
ered with ice.
Clean the sensor.
(Flashes)
(If equipped)
Indicates that the radar cruise
control system is unable to
judge vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance.
If the windshield
wipers are on, turn
them off or set
them to either the
intermittent or the
slow mode.
5
When trouble arises
513
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message Details Correction
procedure
(Flashes
rapidly)
(If equipped)
Indicates that there is a high
possibility of a collision, or that
the pre-collision braking func-
tion is operating.
A buzzer also sounds.
At the same time,
will appear on the
head-up display (the image
flashes).
Slow the vehicle by
applying the
brakes.
(If equipped)
Indicates that there is a high
possibility of a collision.
Slow the vehicle by
applying the
brakes.
(If equipped,
flashes)
Indicates that your vehicle is
nearing the vehicle ahead (in
radar cruise mode).
A buzzer also sounds.
At the same time,
will appear on the
head-up display (the image
flashes).
Slow the vehicle by
applying the
brakes.
514
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message Details Correction
procedure
(If equipped)
Indicates that the LKA is not
currently functional.
Restart the LKA.
In case of over-
heating, the system
will become func-
tional once the sys-
tem cools down.
Alerts the driver that the vehi-
cle is out of the lanes (while
the LKA system is operating).
A buzzer also sounds. The
lane markings and/or the
steering wheel marking flash.
At the same time,
will appear on the
head-up display (the image
flashes).
Check around the
vehicle and back to
inside of the lane
markings.
The hybrid system has over-
heated.
A buzzer also sounds.
This message may be dis-
played when driving under
severe operating conditions.
(For example, when driving
up a long steep hill.)
Stop and check.
(P. 549)
(Flashes)
The hybrid battery (traction
battery) is low.
A buzzer also sounds.
When stopping the
vehicle for a long
period of time, shift
the shift position to
P. The hybrid bat-
tery (traction bat-
tery) cannot be
charged with the
shift position in N.
5
When trouble arises
515
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message Details Correction
procedure
(Flashes)
The hybrid battery (traction
battery) power has dropped
because a long period of time
has elapsed after shifting the
shift position to N.
A buzzer also sounds.
Restart the hybrid
system when start-
ing the vehicle.
(Flashes)
The transmission is out of P
when attempting to start the
hybrid system.
Shift the shift posi-
tion to P before
pressing the
“POWER” switch.
(Flashes)
The driver’s door is opened
when the transmission is out of
P with the hybrid system on.
Shift the shift posi-
tion to P.
(Flashes)
Indicates that the accelerator
pedal is depressed while the
shift position is in N.
A buzzer also sounds.
Release the accel-
erator pedal and
shift the shift posi-
tion to D or R.
EV drive mode cannot be
switched to.
A buzzer also sounds.
The reason why EV drive
mode cannot be used is
shown on the second line
(may not be shown in some
instances.)
Use the EV drive
mode when it
becomes available.
516
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message Details Correction
procedure
(Flashes
3times)
EV drive mode has been auto-
matically canceled.
A buzzer also sounds.
The reason why EV drive
mode cannot be used is
shown on the second line
(may not be shown in some
instances.)
Drive normally for a
short time.
■Approach warning message
In the following instances, there is the possibility that the approach warning
will not activate even when the vehicle-to-vehicle distance decreases.
●When your vehicle and the vehicle ahead are traveling at the same
speed or the vehicle ahead is traveling more quickly than your vehicle.
●When the vehicle ahead is traveling at very low speed.
●Immediately after cruise control speed is set.
●At the instant the accelerator pedal is depressed.
5
When trouble arises
517
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Have the malfunction repaired immediately.
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem,
check that the warning message and light turn off.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer Warning message Details Correction
procedure
Once
(Comes on for 15 seconds.)
(Flashes)
The electronic
key is not
detected when
attempting to
start the hybrid
system.
Confirm
the loca-
tion of the
electronic
key.
Once 3 times
(Flashes)
An open door
other than the
driver’s door is
closed while the
electronic key is
outside the
detection range
and the
“POWER”
switch is in
ACCESSORY
or ON mode.
Confirm
the loca-
tion of the
electronic
key.
518
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer Warning message Details Correction
procedure
Once 3 times
(Flashes)
An open door
other than the
driver’s door is
closed while the
electronic key is
outside the
detection range
and the
“POWER”
switch is in
ACCESSORY
or ON mode
with the shift
position in P.
Turn the
“POWER”
switch to
OFF or
confirm
the loca-
tion of the
electronic
key.
Contin-
uous
(Flashes)
The driver’s
door has been
opened with the
shift position in
a position other
than P and with-
out first turning
the “POWER”
switch is OFF.
Shift the
shift posi-
tion to P.
5
When trouble arises
519
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer Warning message Details Correction
procedure
Once Contin-
uous
(Displayed alternately)
(Flashes)
The electronic
key has been
taken outside
the vehicle and
the doors have
been locked
without first
turning the
“POWER”
switch to OFF.
(vehicles with
entry function)
Turn the
“POWER”
switch to
OFF and
lock the
doors
again.
520
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer Warning message Details Correction
procedure
Once Contin-
uous
(Flashes)
An attempt to
lock the doors
has been made
using the smart
key system
while the elec-
tronic key is
inside the vehi-
cle. (vehicles
with entry func-
tion)
Take the
electronic
key out-
side the
vehicle,
and lock
the doors
again.
With the key
inside the vehi-
cle, a front door
has been
opened, the
lock lever has
been pulled in
the lock direc-
tion, the door
has been
closed and an
attempt has
been made to
lock the door.
5
When trouble arises
521
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer Warning message Details Correction
procedure
Contin-
uous
Contin-
uous
(Displayed alternately)
(Flashes)
An open door
other than the
driver’s door is
closed while the
electronic key is
outside the
detection range
and the
“POWER”
switch is in
ACCESSORY
or ON mode
with the shift
position not in P.
• Shift the
shift posi-
tion to P.
• Confirm
the loca-
tion of the
electronic
key.
Once
(Comes on for 15 seconds.)
The electronic
key battery is
low.
Replace
the bat-
tery.
(P. 454)
Once
(Flashes)
An open door
has been
closed and the
“POWER”
switch has been
turned twice to
the ACCES-
SORY mode
from OFF.
Press the
“POWER”
switch
while
applying
the
brakes.
522
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer Warning message Details Correction
procedure
Once
(Flashes)
The elec-
tronic key
does not
operate
properly.
P. 541
Power
was
turned off
due to
the auto-
matic
power off
function.
Next time when
starting the
hybrid system,
increase the
engine speed
slightly and
maintain that
level for approxi-
mately 5 min-
utes to recharge
the battery.
NOTICE
■While the engine oil level warning is displayed
Continued engine operation with low engine oil will damage the engine.
■Engine oil maintenance message
The warning message is based on the projected driving range after engine
oil maintenance message is reset.
The system does not monitor the purity of the engine oil.
5
When trouble arises
523
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you have a flat tire
Remove the flat tire and replace it with the spare provided.
■Before jacking up the vehicle
●Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface.
●Set the parking brake.
●Shift the shift position to P.
●Stop the hybrid system.
●Turn on the emergency flashers.
■Location of the spare tire, jack and tools
*: The shape may differ depending on the grade, etc.
Center deck board*
Wheel nut wrench
Jack handle
Spare tire
Towing
eyelet
Jack
Center
auxiliary box*
524
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Taking out the jack
Remove the center deck board and center auxiliary box.
Type A
Pull the strap up to open the cen-
ter deck board, lift up the center
auxiliary box, and unload it from
the vehicle.
Type B
Turn the knob to the UNLOCK
position to unfasten the lock,
and remove the center deck
board.
Fold the center deck board
toward the front of the vehicle,
and unload it from the vehicle.
Remove the center auxiliary
box.
STEP
1
5
When trouble arises
525
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Remove the jack handle.
Unhook the tightening strap.
After storing the jack, make
sure it is securely held by the
tightening strap.
Taking out the spare tire
Loosen the center fastener that
secures the spare tire.
ITI52P200a
STEP
2
CAUTION
■Service plug
Be careful not to hit the service plug when loading or unloading the tool
holder or the spare tire. (P. 36)
526
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Replacing a flat tire
Chock the tires.
Vehicles with wheel ornament,
remove the wheel ornament
using the wrench.
To prevent damage, cover the
tip of the wrench with a rag.
STEP
1
Flat tire Wheel chock positions
Front Left-hand side Behind the rear right-hand side tire
Right-hand side Behind the rear left-hand side tire
Rear Left-hand side In front of the front right-hand side tire
Right-hand side In front of the front left-hand side tire
STEP
2
5
When trouble arises
527
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Slightly loosen the wheel nuts
(one turn).
Turn the tire jack portion “A” by
hand until the notch of the jack is
in contact with the jack point.
Raise the vehicle until the tire is
slightly raised off the ground.
ITO52P108
STEP
3
STEP
4
ITO52P112
STEP
5
528
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Remove all the wheel nuts and
the tire.
When resting the tire on the
ground, place the tire so that the
wheel design faces up to avoid
scratching the wheel surface.
Installing the spare tire
Remove any dirt or foreign mat-
ter from the wheel contact sur-
face.
If foreign matter is on the wheel
contact surface, the wheel nuts
may loosen while the vehicle is
in motion, and the tire may
come off the vehicle.
Install the tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by hand by
approximately the same amount.
ITO52P114
STEP
6
STEP
1
STEP
2
5
When trouble arises
529
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Replacing an aluminum wheel with a compact spare tire
Tighten the nuts until the tapered
portion comes into loose contact
with the disc wheel seat.
Replacing an aluminum wheel with an aluminum wheel
Turn the nut washers until they
come into contact with the disc
wheel.
Tapered portion
Disc wheel
seat
Disc wheel
Washer
530
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Lower the vehicle.
Firmly tighten each nut two or
three times in the order shown in
the illustration.
Tightening torque:
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
Vehicles with wheel ornament,
reinstall the wheel ornament.*
Align the cutout of the wheel
ornament with the valve stem
as shown.
*: The wheel ornament cannot
be installed on the compact
spare tire.
Stow the flat tire, the tire jack and all tools.
ITO52P119
STEP
3
ITO52P120
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
6
5
When trouble arises
531
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Stowing the flat tire
For vehicles with a 17-inch
wheel: Before stowing the flat
tire, remove the center wheel
ornament by pushing from the
reverse side.
Place the flat tire on the deck
board, and pass the belt through
the lower-right cargo hook and
then through the hole in the cen-
ter of the tire.
Pass the belt through the lower-
left cargo hook.
ITO52P123
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
532
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Pass the belt through the buckle
and secure the tire firmly. Check
that the belt is securely held by
the buckle.
The belt cannot be fastened
securely if the buckle is facing
the wrong direction.
STEP
4
■The compact spare tire
●The compact spare tire is identified by the label “TEMPORARY USE
ONLY” on the tire sidewall.
Use the compact spare tire temporarily, and only in an emergency.
●Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure of the compact spare
tire. (P. 569)
■After completing the tire change
The tire pressure warning system must be reset. (P. 439)
■When using the compact spare tire
As the compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be
indicated by the tire pressure warning system. Also, if you replace the
compact spare tire after the tire pressure warning light comes on, the
light remains on.
5
When trouble arises
533
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■If you have a flat front tire on a road covered with snow or ice
Install the compact spare tire on one of the rear wheels of the vehicle.
Perform the following steps and fit tire chains to the front tires:
Replace a rear tire with the compact spare tire.
Replace the flat front tire with the tire removed from the rear of
the vehicle.
Fit tire chains to the front tires.
■Jack point guide
CAUTION
■When using the compact spare tire
●Remember that the spare tire provided is specifically designed for use
with your vehicle. Do not use your spare tire on another vehicle.
●Do not use more than one spare tires simultaneously.
●Replace the spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possible.
●Avoid sudden acceleration, deceleration and braking, as well as sharp
cornering.
■When storing the compact spare tire
Be careful not to catch fingers or other body parts between the compact
spare tire and the body of the vehicle.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
The jack point guides are located under
the rocker panel. They indicate the jack
point positions.
534
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■When the compact spare tire is attached
The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following sys-
tems may not operate correctly:
●ABS & Brake assist
●VSC
●TRAC
●Cruise control (if equipped)
●Dynamic radar cruise control (if equipped)
●Pre-collision system (if equipped)
●LKA (if equipped)
●EPS
●Rear view monitor system (if equipped)
●Advanced parking guidance system (if equipped)
●Navigation system (if equipped)
■Speed limit when using the compact spare tire
Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a compact
spare tire is installed on the vehicle.
The compact spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failure
to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or seri-
ous injury.
5
When trouble arises
535
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■Using the tire jack
Improper use of the tire jack may cause the vehicle to suddenly fall off
the jack, leading to death or serious injury.
Observe the following precautions:
●Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or
installing and removing tire chains.
●Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat
tire.
Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for
replacing tires on this vehicle.
●Always check that the tire jack is securely set to the jack point.
●Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while it is supported
by the jack.
●Do not start or run the hybrid system while your vehicle is supported by
the jack.
●Do not raise the vehicle while someone is inside.
●When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.
●Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to
replace the tire.
●Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.
Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one
working on or near the vehicle may be injured.
536
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■Replacing a flat tire
●Do not touch the disc wheels or the area around the brakes immedi-
ately after the vehicle has been driven.
After the vehicle has been driven the disc wheels and the area around
the brakes will be extremely hot. Touching these areas with hands, feet
or other body parts while changing a tire, etc. may result in burns.
●Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to
loosen and the tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury.
• Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 76 ft•lbf (103
N•m, 10.5 kgf•m) as soon as possible after changing wheels.
• When installing a tire, only use wheel nuts that have been specifically
designed for that wheel.
• If there are any cracks or deformations in the bolt screws, nut threads
or bolt holes of the wheel, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
• When installing the wheel nuts, be sure to install the wheel nuts with
the tapered end facing inward. (P. 452)
■After using the tools and jack
Before driving, make sure all the tools and jack are securely in place in
their storage location to reduce the possibility of personal injury during a
collision or sudden braking.
■When stowing the flat tire
●Make sure the rear seatbacks are in their original position.
●Secure it using a tire tie-down belt. Otherwise, the flat tire may fly out
in case of sudden braking or an accident, resulting in death or serious
injury.
5
When trouble arises
537
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire
Do not continue driving with a flat tire.
Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the
wheel beyond repair.
■Be careful when driving over bumps with the compact spare tire
installed on the vehicle
The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire
compared to when driving with standard tires. Be careful when driving
over uneven road surfaces.
■Driving with tire chains and the compact spare tire
Do not fit tire chains to the compact spare tire.
Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving
performance.
■When replacing the tires
When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
■To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmit-
ters
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is
used, contact your Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop as soon
as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter when replacing the tire. (P. 438)
538
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the hybrid system will not start
Reasons for the hybrid system not starting vary depending on the
situation. Check the following and perform the appropriate proce-
dure:
■The hybrid system will not start even though the correct
starting procedure is being followed (P. 192)
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
●The electronic key may not be functioning properly.*
(P. 541)
●There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.
Refuel the vehicle.
●There may be a malfunction in the immobilizer system.*
(P. 135)
●There may be a malfunction in the P position control system.*
(P. 197, 509)
*: It may not be possible to shift the shift position from P to another
position.
■The interior lights and headlights are dim, or the horn does
not sound or sounds at a low volume
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
●The 12-volt battery may be discharged. (P. 543)
●The 12-volt battery terminal connections may be loose or cor-
roded.
5
When trouble arises
539
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Emergency start function
When the hybrid system does not start, the following steps can be
used as an interim measure to start the hybrid system if the
“POWER” switch is functioning normally:
Set the parking brake.
Turn the “POWER” switch to ACCESSORY mode.
Press and hold the “POWER” switch for about 15 seconds
while depressing the brake pedal firmly.
Even if the hybrid system can be started using the above steps, the
system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
■The interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn
does not sound
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
●One or both of the 12-volt battery terminals may be discon-
nected.
●The 12-volt battery may be discharged. (P. 543)
Contact your Toyota dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if
repair procedures are unknown.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
540
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you lose your keys
New genuine keys can be made by your Toyota dealer using the
other key and the key number stamped on your key number plate.
5
When trouble arises
541
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the electronic key does not operate properly
Locking and unlocking the doors
Use the mechanical key (P. 58)
in order to perform the following
operations:
Locks all the doors
Unlocks the door
Turning the key rearward unlocks
the driver’s door. Turning the key
once again within 3 seconds
unlocks the other doors.
If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is inter-
rupted (P. 72) or the electronic key cannot be used because the
battery is depleted, the smart key system and wireless remote con-
trol cannot be used. In such cases, the doors can be opened and the
hybrid system can be started by following the procedure below.
ITO52P121
542
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Changing “POWER” switch modes and starting the hybrid
system
Depress the brake pedal.
Touch the Toyota emblem side of
the electronic key to the
“POWER” switch.
If any of the doors is opened or
closed while the key is being
touched to the switch, an alarm
will sound to indicate that the start
function cannot detect the elec-
tronic key.
Perform the following operations.
To change “POWER” switch modes: Within 10 seconds of the
buzzer sounding, release the brake pedal and press the
“POWER” switch. Modes can be changed each time the
switch is pressed. (P. 194)
To start the hybrid system: Press the “POWER” switch within
10 seconds of the buzzer sounding, keeping the brake pedal
depressed.
In the event that the hybrid system still cannot be operated, contact
your Toyota dealer.
STEP
1
STEP
2
■Stopping the hybrid system
Set the parking brake, shift the shift position to P and press the “POWER”
switch as you normally do when stopping the hybrid system.
■Replacing the key battery
As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the
electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery is depleted.
(P. 454)
STEP
3
5
When trouble arises
543
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the 12-volt battery is discharged
The following procedures may be used to start the hybrid system if
the vehicle’s 12-volt battery is discharged.
You can also call your Toyota dealer or a qualified repair shop.
If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehi-
cle with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your vehicle by follow-
ing the steps below.
Open the hood and fuse block
cover.
When closing, first hook the lid
onto the two rear tabs.
Open the exclusive jump start-
ing terminal cover.
ITO43P127
STEP
1
STEP
2
544
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Connect the jumper cables according to the following procedure:
Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to the exclusive jump
starting terminal on your vehicle.
Connect the clamp on the other end of the positive cable to the
positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle.
Connect a negative cable clamp to the negative (-) battery termi-
nal on the second vehicle.
Connect the clamp at the other end of the negative cable to a
solid, stationary, unpainted metallic point away from the exclu-
sive jump starting terminal and any moving parts, as shown in
the illustration.
STEP
3
5
When trouble arises
545
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine
speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately
5 minutes to recharge the battery of your vehicle.
Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and start
the hybrid system of your vehicle by turning the “POWER”
switch to ON mode.
Make sure the “READY” indicator comes on. If the indicator
light does not come on, contact your Toyota dealer.
Once the hybrid system has started, remove the jumper
cables in the exact reverse order from which they were con-
nected.
Close the exclusive jump starting terminal cover, and rein-
stall the fuse box cover to its original position.
When installing, first hook the fuse box cover onto the two rear
tabs.
Once the hybrid system starts, have the vehicle inspected at
your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
6
STEP
7
STEP
8
546
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■Starting the hybrid system when the 12-volt battery is discharged
The hybrid system cannot be started by push-starting.
■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
●Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the hybrid system is
off.
●Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is run-
ning at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic.
■When the 12-volt battery is removed or discharged
●The hybrid system may not start. (P. 433)
●If the 12-volt battery is depleted with the shift position in P, it will not be
possible to shift the shift position other than P. In this case, the vehicle
cannot be towed without lifting both front wheels because the front
wheels are locked by the parking lock. (P. 485)
●When the 12-volt battery is reconnected, start the hybrid system, depress
the brake pedal, and confirm that it is possible to shift into each shift posi-
tion.
■Charging the 12-volt battery
The electricity stored in the 12-volt battery will discharge gradually even
when the vehicle is not in use, due to natural discharge and the draining
effects of certain electrical appliances. If the vehicle is left for a long time, the
12-volt battery may discharge, and the hybrid system may be unable to start.
(The 12-volt battery recharges automatically while the hybrid system is oper-
ating.)
5
When trouble arises
547
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■Avoiding 12-volt battery fires or explosions
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flam-
mable gas that may be emitted from the 12-volt battery:
●Make sure each jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that
it is not unintentionally in contact with any other than the intended terminal.
●Do not allow the other end of the jumper cable connected to the “+” termi-
nal to come into contact with any other parts or metal surfaces in the area,
such as brackets or unpainted metal.
●Do not allow the + and - clamps of the jumper cables to come into contact
with each other.
●Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near
the 12-volt battery.
■12-volt battery precautions
The 12-volt battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte,
while related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following
precautions when handling the 12-volt battery:
●When working with the 12-volt battery, always wear safety glasses and
take care not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with
skin, clothing or the vehicle body.
●Do not lean over the 12-volt battery.
●In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes,
immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.
Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention
can be received.
●Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and
other battery-related parts.
●Do not allow children near the 12-volt battery.
548
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■After recharging the 12-volt battery
Have the 12-volt battery inspected at your Toyota dealer as soon as possi-
ble.
If the 12-volt battery is deteriorating, continued use may cause the 12-volt
battery to emit a malodorous gas, which may be detrimental to the health of
passengers.
■When replacing the 12-volt battery
P. 435
NOTICE
■When handling jumper cables
When connecting the jumper cables, ensure that they do not become entan-
gled in the cooling fans, etc.
■Exclusive jump starting terminal
The exclusive jump starting terminal is to be used when charging the 12-volt
battery from another vehicle in an emergency. It cannot be used to jump start
another vehicle.
5
When trouble arises
549
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle overheats
Correction procedures
■If the high coolant temperature warning light flashes or comes
on
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air condition-
ing system.
Check to see if steam is coming out from under the hood.
If you see steam:
Stop the hybrid system. Carefully lift the hood after the
steam subsides and then restart the hybrid system.
If you do not see steam:
Leave the hybrid system operating and carefully lift the
hood.
The following may indicate that your vehicle is overheating:
●The high coolant temperature warning light flashes or comes on:
The engine may be overheating.
●“HYBRID SYSTEM OVERHEAT” is shown on the multi-informa-
tion display:
The power control unit may be overheating.
Follow the correction procedure as described below.
STEP
1
STEP
2
550
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Check to see if the cooling fans are operating.
If the fans are operating:
Wait until the high coolant temperature warning light goes
off and then stop the hybrid system.
If the fans are not operating:
Stop the hybrid system immediately and call your Toyota
dealer.
After the hybrid system has
cooled down sufficiently, check
the engine coolant level and
inspect the cooling system for
leaks.
If necessary, add engine coolant
up to the “FULL” line.
Water can be used in an emer-
gency measure if engine coolant
is unavailable. (P. 566)
Have the vehicle checked at nearest Toyota dealer as soon as possi-
ble.
STEP
3
STEP
4
ITO52P130
STEP
5
5
When trouble arises
551
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■If “HYBRID SYSTEM OVERHEAT” is shown on the multi-infor-
mation display
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air condition-
ing system.
Leave the hybrid system operating and carefully lift the hood.
Check if the cooling fans are operating.
If the fans are operating:
Wait until “HYBRID SYSTEM OVERHEAT” disappears and
then stop the hybrid system.
If the warning light does not turn off, call your Toyota dealer.
If the fans are not operating:
Stop the hybrid system immediately and call your Toyota
dealer.
After the hybrid system has
cooled down, check the power
control unit coolant level and
inspect the cooling system for
leaks.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
552
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If necessary, add power control
unit coolant up to the “F” line.
Water can be used in an emer-
gency measure if power control
unit coolant is unavailable.
(P. 566)
Have the vehicle checked at nearest Toyota dealer as soon as possi-
ble.
STEP
5
■Overheating
The following symptoms may occur when your vehicle is overheating:
●Hybrid system output decrease
●Steam is coming from under the hood
5
When trouble arises
553
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of
your vehicle
●If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until
the steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot, caus-
ing serious injuries such as burns.
●Check that the indicator on the “POWER” switch and the “READY” indica-
tor are off.
●For vehicles with a hybrid system, there are times when the gasoline
engine automatically starts to run or the cooling fans suddenly start to
operate. Do not touch or approach the rotating parts of the fans, etc. Doing
so may lead to fingers, clothes or tools getting caught, resulting in injury.
●Do not loosen the coolant reservoir cap while the hybrid system and radia-
tor are hot.
Serious injury, such as burns, may result from hot coolant and steam
released under pressure.
NOTICE
■When adding engine/power control unit coolant
Wait until the hybrid system has cooled down before adding engine/power
control unit coolant.
When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot hybrid sys-
tem too quickly can cause damage to the hybrid system.
■To prevent damage to the cooling system
Observe the following precautions:
●Avoid contaminating the coolant with foreign matter (such as sand or dust
etc.)
●Do not use commercially available coolant additives
554
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the vehicle becomes stuck
CAUTION
■When attempting to free a stuck vehicle
If you choose to push the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the sur-
rounding area is clear to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or people. The
vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free.
Use extreme caution.
■When changing the shift position
Be careful not to change the shift position with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
Changing the shift position to any positions other than P or N may cause the
vehicle to accelerate abruptly, causing an accident and resulting in death or
serious injury.
Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle
becomes stuck in mud, dirt or snow:
Set the parking brake and shift the shift position to P. Stop
the hybrid system.
Remove the mud, snow or sand from around the stuck tire.
Place wood, stones or some other material under the tires
to help provide traction.
Restart the hybrid system.
Shift the shift position to D or R, release the parking brake
and carefully apply the accelerator to free the vehicle.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
5
When trouble arises
555
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■To avoid damage to the hybrid transmission and other components
●Avoid spinning the wheels and depressing the accelerator pedal more
than necessary.
●If the vehicle remains stuck even after these procedures are performed,
the vehicle may require towing to be freed.
556
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency
Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the
vehicle in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following pro-
cedure:
Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly
depress it.
Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the
effort required to slow the vehicle.
Shift the shift position to N.
If the shift position is shifted to N
After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the
road.
Stop the hybrid system.
If the shift position cannot be shifted to N
Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce
vehicle speed as much as possible.
To stop the hybrid system,
press and hold the “POWER”
switch for 3 consecutive sec-
onds or more, or press it
briefly for 3 times or more in
succession.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
3
STEP
4
Press and hold for 3 seconds or more, or
press briefly for 3 times or more
STEP
5
5
When trouble arises
557
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■If the hybrid system has to be turned off while driving
Power assist for the brakes and steering wheel will be lost, making the brake
pedal harder to depress and the steering wheel heavier to turn. Decelerate
as much as possible before turning off the hybrid system.
558
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
560
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)
Dimensions and weight
*1: Unladen vehicle
*2: Vehicles without moon roof with Solar Panel
*3: Vehicles with moon roof with Solar Panel
*4: Vehicles with 15-inch tires
*5: Vehicles with 17-inch tires
Overall length 176.4 in. (4480 mm)
Overall width 68.7 in. (1745 mm)
Overall height*158.7 in. (1490 mm)*2
59.3 in. (1505 mm)*3
Wheelbase 106.3 in. (2700 mm)
Tread
Front 60.0 in. (1525 mm)*4
59.6 in. (1515 mm)*5
Rear 59.8 in. (1520 mm)*4
59.4 in. (1510 mm)*5
Vehicle capacity weight
(Occupants + luggage) 825 lb. (370 kg)
561
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Vehicle identification
■Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for
your vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your
Toyota. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.
This number is stamped on the
top left of the instrument panel.
This number is also on the Certi-
fication Label.
This number is also stamped
under the right-hand front seat.
ITO61P101
562
6-1. Specifications
■Engine number
The engine number is stamped
on the engine block as shown.
Engine
Fuel
Model 1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FXE)
Type 4-cylinder in line, 4-cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke 3.17 3.48 in. (80.5 88.3 mm)
Displacement 109.7 cu.in. (1798 cm3)
Valve clearance
(engine cold) Automatic adjustment
Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only
Octane Rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference) 11.9 gal. (45 L, 9.9 Imp.gal.)
563
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Electric motor (Traction motor)
Hybrid battery (traction battery)
Lubrication system
*: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing the
engine oil. Warm up the engine and turn off the hybrid system, wait more
than 5 minutes, and check the oil level on the dipstick.
Type Permanent magnet motor
Maximum output 60 kW
Maximum torque 153 ft•lbf (207 N•m, 21.1 kgf•m)
Type Nickel-Metal hydride battery
Voltage 7.2 V/module
Capacity 6.5 Ah (3HR)
Quantity 28 modules
Overall voltage 201.6 V
Oil capacity
(Drain and refill
reference*)
With filter
Without filter
4.4 qt. (4.2 L, 3.7 Imp.qt.)
4.1 qt. (3.9 L, 3.4 Imp.qt.)
564
6-1. Specifications
■Engine oil selection
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Toyota vehicle. Use
Toyota approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy
the following grade and viscosity.
Oil grade: ILSAC multigrade engine oil
Recommended viscosity: SAE 0W-20
SAE 0W-20 is the good choice
for good fuel economy and good
starting in cold weather.
If SAE 0W-20 is not available,
SAE 5W-20 oil may be used.
However, it must be replaced
with SAE 0W-20 at the next oil
change.
Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained here as an example):
• The 0W in 0W-20 indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows
cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier
starting of the engine in cold weather.
• The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil when
the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity (one with a
higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high
speeds, or under extreme load conditions.
Outside temperature
565
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
How to read oil container label:
The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standardization and Approval
Committee) Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help
you select the oil you should use.
566
6-1. Specifications
Cooling system
Ignition system
Capacity
Gasoline
engine
Without an exhaust heat recovery system
6.9 qt. (6.5 L, 5.7 Imp.qt.)
With an exhaust heat recovery system
7.6 qt. (7.2 L, 6.3 Imp.qt.)
Power
control
unit
2.2 qt. (2.1 L, 1.8 Imp.qt.)
Coolant type
Use either of the following:
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
• Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-
silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate
coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technol-
ogy
Do not use plain water alone.
Spark plug
Make DENSO SC20HR11
Gap 0.043 in. (1.1 mm)
NOTICE
■Iridium-tipped spark plugs
Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust the spark plug gap.
567
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Electrical system
Transmission
*: The fluid capacity is the quantity of reference.
If replacement is necessary, contact your Toyota dealer.
12-volt battery
12.6 12.8 V Fully charged
12.2 12.4 V Half charged
11.5 11.9 V Discharged
(Voltage is checked 20 minutes after the hybrid
system and all lights are turned off.)
Open voltage
at 68 F (20 C):
Charging rates 5 A max.
Fluid capacity*3.6 qt. (3.4 L, 3.0 Imp.qt.)
Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF WS
NOTICE
■Transmission fluid type
Using transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may cause
deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by
vibration, and ultimately damage the transmission of your vehicle.
568
6-1. Specifications
Brakes
*1: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 44.1 lbf (196 N,
20.0 kgf) while the hybrid system is operating.
*2: Parking brake pedal travel when depressed with a force of 67.5 lbf (300 N,
30.6 kgf).
Steering
Pedal clearance*13.03 in. (77 mm) Min.
Pedal free play 0.04 0.24 in. (1.0 6.0 mm)
Brake pad wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Parking brake lining wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Parking brake pedal travel*28 11 clicks
Fluid type SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3
Free play Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)
569
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Tires and wheels
Type A
Type B
Compact spare tire
Tire size P195/65R15 89S
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)
Front tire
35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Rear tire
33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Wheel size 15 6J
Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
Tire size P215/45R17 87V
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)
Front tire
33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Rear tire
32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Wheel size 17 7J
Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
Tire size T135/80D16 101M
Spare tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure) 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Wheel size 16 4T
Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
570
6-1. Specifications
Light bulbs
A: H11 halogen bulbs
B: HB3 halogen bulbs
C: H16 halogen bulbs
D: Wedge base bulbs (amber)
E: Wedge base bulbs (clear)
F: Double end bulbs
*: If equipped
Light Bulbs Bulb No. WType
Exterior
Halogen headlights
Low beam
High beam
LED headlights
High beam
H11
9005
9005
55
60
60
A
B
B
Fog lights*H16 19 C
Front turn signal lights WY21W 21 D
Front side marker lights W5W 5 E
Parking lights
(halogen headlights) W5W 5 E
Rear turn signal lights WY21W 21 D
Back-up lights W21W 21 E
License plate lights W5W 5 E
Interior
Front interior/personal lights 5E
Rear interior light 8F
Vanity lights 8E
Door courtesy lights 5E
Luggage compartment light 5F
571
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Fuel information
■Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline
To help prevent incorrect fueling, your vehicle has a fuel tank opening that
only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.
■Gasoline quality
In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gas-
oline you are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of
gasoline. If this does not correct the problem, consult your Toyota dealer.
You must only use unleaded gasoline in your vehicle.
Select octane rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher. Use
of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 87 may result
in engine knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage.
At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications
of ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB3.5-M93 in Canada.
572
6-1. Specifications
■Gasoline quality standards
●Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.A., Europe and Japan have devel-
oped a specification for fuel quality called the World-Wide Fuel Charter
(WWFC), which is expected to be applied worldwide.
●The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emis-
sion levels. In the U.S., category 4 has been adopted.
●The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets,
and improves customer satisfaction through better performance.
■Recommendation of the use of gasoline containing detergent additives
●Toyota recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives
to avoid the build-up of engine deposits.
●All gasoline sold in the U.S.A. contains detergent additives to clean and/
or keep clean intake systems.
■Recommendation of the use of cleaner burning gasoline
Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxy-
genates such as ethanol or MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) is available in
many areas.
Toyota recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately
blended reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent
vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
573
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
■Non-recommendation of the use of blended gasoline
●If you use gasohol in your vehicle, be sure that it has an octane rating no
lower than 87.
●Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.
■Non-recommendation of the use of gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains an octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methyl-
cyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel
containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely
affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If
this happens, contact your Toyota dealer for service.
■If your engine knocks
●Consult your Toyota dealer.
●You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while acceler-
ating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.
●Use only gasoline containing a maxi-
mum of 10% ethanol.
DO NOT use any flex-fuel or gasoline
that could contain more than 10% etha-
nol, including from any pump labeled
E15, E30, E50, E85 (which are only
some examples of fuel containing more
than 10% ethanol).
DO NOT use gasoline
containing more than
10% ethanol.
(15% ethanol)
(50% ethanol)
(85% ethanol)
574
6-1. Specifications
NOTICE
■Notice on fuel quality
●Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used, the engine will be
damaged.
●Do not use leaded gasoline.
Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s three-way catalytic
converters causing the emission control system to malfunction.
●Do not use gasohol other than the type previously stated.
Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems.
●Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than the
level previously stated will cause persistent heavy knocking.
At worst, this will lead to engine damage.
■Fuel-related poor driveability
If poor driveability is encountered after using a different type of fuel (poor hot
starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.), discontinue the use of that type
of fuel.
■When refueling with gasohol
Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle’s paint.
576
6-1. Specifications
Tire ply composition and materials
Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the
strands which form the plies in a tire.
Summer tires or all season tires (P. 442)
An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked
“M+S” is a summer tire.
Radial tires or bias-ply tires
A radial tire has “RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked
“RADIAL” is a bias-ply tire.
TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE
A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly put into the
tire. A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube main-
tains the air pressure.
Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure (P. 442)
Maximum cold tire inflation pressure (P. 569)
This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
Uniform tire quality grading
For details, see “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” that follows.
“TEMPORARY USE ONLY”
A compact spare tire is identified by the phrase “TEMPORARY USE
ONLY” molded on its sidewall. This tire is designed for temporary
emergency use only.
577
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Typical DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)
DOT symbol*
Tire Identification Number
(TIN)
Tire manufacturer’s identifica-
tion mark
Tire size code
Manufacturer’s optional tire
type code (3 or 4 letters)
Manufacturing week
Manufacturing year
*: The DOT symbol certifies
that the tire conforms to
applicable Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards.
578
6-1. Specifications
Tire size
■Typical tire size information
The illustration indicates typical tire size.
Tire use
(P = Passenger car,
T = Temporary use)
Section width (millimeters)
Aspect ratio
(tire height to section width)
Tire construction code
(R = Radial, D = Diagonal)
Wheel diameter (inches)
Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)
Speed symbol
(alphabet with one letter)
■Tire dimensions
Section width
Tire height
Wheel diameter
ITO61P106
ITO61P103
579
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Tire section names
Bead
Sidewall
Shoulder
Tread
Belt
Inner liner
Reinforcing rubber
Carcass
Rim lines
Bead wires
Chafer
580
6-1. Specifications
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations
issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the
U.S. Department of Transportation.
It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Toyota
vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.
Your Toyota dealer will help answer any questions you may have as
you read this information.
■DOT quality grades
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be
found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
■Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear
rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a speci-
fied government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2)
times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions
of their use. Performance may differ significantly from the norm due
to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
581
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
■Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C,
and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking
(straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turn-
ing) traction.
■Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, represent-
ing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to
dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a speci-
fied indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead
to sudden tire failure.
Grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the labo-
ratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grades of a tire assume that it is properly
inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either sepa-
rately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire fail-
ure.
582
6-1. Specifications
Glossary of tire terminology
Tire related term Meaning
Cold tire inflation pres-
sure
Tire pressure when the vehicle has been
parked for three hours or more, or has not
been driven more than 1 mile or 1.5 km under
that condition
Maximum inflation
pressure
The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a
tire may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of
the tire
Recommended infla-
tion pressure Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a
manufacturer
Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of those stan-
dard items which may be replaced) of auto-
matic transmission, power steering, power
brakes, power windows, power seats, radio
and heater, to the extent that these items are
available as factory-installed equipment
(whether installed or not)
Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard
equipment, including the maximum capacity of
fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air
conditioning and additional weight optional
engine
Maximum loaded vehi-
cle weight
The sum of:
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight
583
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Tire related term Meaning
Normal occupant
weight
150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants
specified in the second column of Table 1* that
follows
Occupant distribution Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as speci-
fied in the third column of Table 1* below
Production options
weight
The combined weight of installed regular pro-
duction options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in
excess of the standard items which they
replace, not previously considered in curb
weight or accessory weight, including heavy
duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty
12-volt battery, and special trim
Rim A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire beads are seated
Rim diameter
(Wheel diameter) Nominal diameter of the bead seat
Rim size designation Rim diameter and width
Rim type designation The industry manufacturer’s designation for a
rim by style or code
Rim width Nominal distance between rim flanges
Vehicle capacity
weight (Total load
capacity)
The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb.
(68 kg) times the vehicle’s designated seating
capacity
584
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term Meaning
Vehicle maximum load
on the tire
The load on an individual tire that is determined
by distributing to each axle its share of the
maximum loaded vehicle weight, and dividing
by two
Vehicle normal load
on the tire
The load on an individual tire that is determined
by distributing to each axle its share of curb
weight, accessory weight, and normal occu-
pant weight (distributed in accordance with
Table 1* below), and dividing by two
Weather side The surface area of the rim not covered by the
inflated tire
Bead The part of the tire that is made of steel wires,
wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is
shaped to fit the rim
Bead separation A breakdown of the bond between components
in the bead
Bias ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles
substantially less than 90 degrees to the cen-
terline of the tread
Carcass The tire structure, except tread and sidewall
rubber which, when inflated, bears the load
Chunking The breaking away of pieces of the tread or
sidewall
585
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Tire related term Meaning
Cord The strands forming the plies in the tire
Cord separation The parting of cords from adjacent rubber com-
pounds
Cracking Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or inner-
liner of the tire extending to cord material
CT
A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire
and rim system in which the rim is designed
with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the
tire is designed to fit on the underside of the
rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges
inside the air cavity of the tire
Extra load tire A tire designed to operate at higher loads and
at higher inflation pressures than the corre-
sponding standard tire
Groove The space between two adjacent tread ribs
Innerliner The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a
tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium
within the tire
Innerliner separation The parting of the innerliner from cord material
in the carcass
586
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term Meaning
Intended outboard
sidewall
(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering, or bears manufac-
turer, brand, and/or model name molding
that is higher or deeper than the same
molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or
(b) The outward facing sidewall of an asym-
metrical tire that has a particular side that
must always face outward when mounted
on a vehicle
Light truck (LT) tire A tire designated by its manufacturer as prima-
rily intended for use on lightweight trucks or
multipurpose passenger vehicles
Load rating The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry
for a given inflation pressure
Maximum load rating The load rating for a tire at the maximum per-
missible inflation pressure for that tire
Maximum permissible
inflation pressure The maximum cold inflation pressure to which
a tire may be inflated
Measuring rim The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical
dimension requirements
Open splice Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or
innerliner that extends to cord material
Outer diameter The overall diameter of an inflated new tire
587
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Tire related term Meaning
Overall width
The linear distance between the exteriors of
the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including eleva-
tions due to labeling, decorations, or protective
bands or ribs
Passenger car tire
A tire intended for use on passenger cars, mul-
tipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that
have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of
10,000 lb. or less.
Ply A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords
Ply separation A parting of rubber compound between adja-
cent plies
Pneumatic tire
A mechanical device made of rubber, chemi-
cals, fabric and steel or other materials, that,
when mounted on an automotive wheel, pro-
vides the traction and contains the gas or fluid
that sustains the load
Radial ply tire A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90
degrees to the centerline of the tread
Reinforced tire A tire designed to operate at higher loads and
at higher inflation pressures than the corre-
sponding standard tire
588
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term Meaning
Section width
The linear distance between the exteriors of
the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding ele-
vations due to labeling, decoration, or protec-
tive bands
Sidewall That portion of a tire between the tread and
bead
Sidewall separation The parting of the rubber compound from the
cord material in the sidewall
Snow tire
A tire that attains a traction index equal to or
greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E-
1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when
using the snow traction test as described in
ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method for
Single Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight Line
on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which
is marked with an Alpine Symbol ( ) on at
least one sidewall
Test rim The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and
may be any rim listed as appropriate for use
with that tire
Tread That portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road
Tread rib A tread section running circumferentially
around a tire
589
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
*:Table 1 Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load
for various designated seating capacities
Tire related term Meaning
Tread separation Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass
Treadwear indicators
(TWI)
The projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the
degrees of wear of the tread
Wheel-holding fixture The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire
assembly securely during testing
Designated seating
capacity, Number of
occupants
Vehicle normal load,
Number of occupants
Occupant distribution in
a normally loaded vehi-
cle
2 through 4 2 2 in front
5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in second
seat
11 through 15 5 2 in front, 1 in second
seat, 1 in third seat, 1
in fourth seat
16 through 20 7 2 in front, 2 in second
seat, 2 in third seat, 1
in fourth seat
590
6-2. Customization
Customizable features
Customizable features
Vehicles with a Display Audio system: Settings that can be
changed using the Display Audio system
(For further information on customizing settings using the “Display
Audio”, refer to the “Display Audio System Owner’s Manual”.)
Vehicles with a navigation system: Settings that can be changed
using the navigation system
(For further information on customizing settings using the naviga-
tion system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.)
Settings that can be changed by your Toyota dealer
Definition of symbols: O = Available, — = Not available
Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be per-
sonalized to suit your preferences. Programming these preferences
requires specialized equipment and may be performed by your
Toyota dealer.
Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions
being customized. Contact your Toyota dealer for further details.
591
6-2. Customization
6
Vehicle specifications
Item Function Default
setting
Custom-
ized
setting
Smart key
system
(P. 61)
Smart key
system ON OFF OOO
Select doors to
unlock
Driver’s
door All doors O O O
Wireless
remote
control
(P. 85)
Wireless remote
control ON OFF – – O
Unlocking
operation
Driver’s
door
unlocked in
1-step, all
doors
unlocked
in 2-step
All doors
unlocked
in 1-step
OOO
Panic function ON OFF – – O
Buzzer sounds
when pushing
with any
door not closed
ON OFF – – O
592
6-2. Customization
Item Function Default
setting
Custom-
ized
setting
Smart key
system
(P. 61) and
wireless
remote
control
(P. 85)
Operation
signals
(Emergency
flashers)
ON OFF – O O
Operation
signals
(Buzzers)
Level 7
Level 1 to 6
OOO
OFF
Time elapsed
before
automatic door
lock function is
activated if door
is not opened
after being
unlocked
60 seconds
OFF
–OO
30
seconds
120
seconds
593
6-2. Customization
6
Vehicle specifications
*: This function cannot be customized for vehicles sold in Canada.
Item Function Default set-
ting
Custom-
ized
setting
Door lock
(P. 87,
541)
Unlocking using
a key
Driver’s
door
unlocked in
1-step, all
doors
unlocked in
2-step
All doors
unlocked in
1-step
–OO
Speed-detecting
automatic door
lock function
OFF ON OOO
Shifting the shift
position to any
position other
than P locks all
doors
ON OFF OOO
Shifting the shift
position to P
unlocks all doors
ON OFF OOO
Opening driver’s
door unlocks all
doors
OFF ON – O O
Automatic
light control
system
(P. 250)
Light sensor
sensitivity Level 3 Levels 1 to
5OOO
Time elapsed
before head-
lights automati-
cally turn off after
doors are closed
30 seconds
0 seconds
OOO60 seconds
90 seconds
Daytime running
lights*ON OFF OOO
594
6-2. Customization
*: When the customized settings are changed using the navigation system,
these functions will be changed between ON and OFF simultaneously.
Item Function Default set-
ting
Custom-
ized
setting
Power
windows
(P. 123)
The one-touch
closing operation
except for
driver’s seat
ON OFF – – O
Illumination
(P. 353)
Time elapsed
before lights turn
off
15 seconds
OFF
–OO
7.5
seconds
30 seconds
Operation when
the doors are
unlocked*ON OFF – O O
Operation after
the “POWER”
switch turned
OFF*
ON OFF – O O
Operation when
you approach
the vehicle with
the electric key
on your person
(When the per-
sonal/interior
light main switch
is door position)*
ON OFF – O O
Foot lights ON OFF – – O
Foot lights oper-
ation when the
vehicle is run-
ning
ON OFF – – O
595
6-2. Customization
6
Vehicle specifications
Item Function Default set-
ting
Custom-
ized
setting
Meter and
instrument
panel
(P. 214)
Sensor sensitiv-
ity for darkening
the brightness of
the meter, navi-
gation system
and instrument
panel depend-
ing on the out-
side brightness
0-2 to +2––O
Sensor sensitiv-
ity for returning
the brightness of
the meter, navi-
gation system
and instrument
panel to the orig-
inal level
depending on
the outside
brightness
0-2 to +2––O
Automatic
air
conditioning
system
(P. 326)
Enable/disable
automatic
operation of the
air conditioning
compressor
when the
“AUTO” switch
ON
ON OFF – O O
Heating/cooling
operation mini-
mized in Eco
drive mode
ON OFF – – O
596
6-2. Customization
Multi-information display (P. 223)
Item Function Default set-
ting
Custom-
ized
setting
Remote Air
Condition-
ing System
(P. 342)
Operation using
the
“A/C” button on
the wireless
remote control
Push and
hold for 0.8
seconds
Push once
––O
Push twice
Push and
hold for 2.4
seconds
OFF
Stopping the
operation using
the “A/C” button
on the wireless
remote control
Push twice
Push once
––O
Push and
hold for 0.8
seconds
Push and
hold for 2.4
seconds
OFF
Reverse
warning
buzzer
(P. 207)
Operation sig-
nals (Buzzer)
when shifting
into R
Beeps
repeatedly
Beeps
once ––O
Seat belt
reminder
(P. 500)
Vehicle speed
linked seat belt
reminder buzzer
ON OFF – – O
Available languages English, French and Spanish
597
6
Vehicle specifications
6-3. Initialization
Items to initialize
Item When to initialize Reference
Maintenance data After the maintenance is performed P. 403
Tire pressure warning
system
• When rotating the tires on vehicles
with differing front and rear tire infla-
tion pressures
• When changing the tire size
P. 439
The following items must be initialized for normal system operation
after such cases as the 12-volt battery being reconnected, or mainte-
nance being performed on the vehicle.
598
6-3. Initialization
600
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
in addition to notifying Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll-free:
1-800-331-4331).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA can-
not become involved in individual problems between you, your
dealer, or Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov
; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA,
1200 New Jersey Ave, S.E., Washington, DC 20590. You can
also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
601
7
For owners
Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French)
The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions
extracted from the seat belt section in this manual.
See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in
English.
602
603
7
For owners
SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French)
604
605
7
For owners
606
607
7
For owners
608
609
7
For owners
610
611
7
For owners
612
613
7
For owners
614
616
Abbreviation list
Abbreviation/Acronym list
ABBREVIATIONS MEANING
A/C Air Conditioning
ABS Anti-lock Brake System
ALR Automatic Locking Retractor
APGS Advanced Parking Guidance System
CRS Child Restraint System
DISP Display
ECO Economy/Ecology
ECU Electronic Control Unit
EDR Event Data Recorder
ELR Emergency Locking Retractor
EPS Electric Power Steering
EV Electric Vehicle
GAWR Gross Axle Weight Ratings
GPS Global Positioning System
GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
I/M Emission Inspection and Maintenance
LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
LED Light Emitting Diode
MMT Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
M + S Mud and Snow
MTBE Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether
617
Abbreviation list
OBD On Board Diagnostics
PCS Pre-Collision System
PWR Power
SRS Supplemental Restraint System
TIN Tire Identification Number
TPMS Tire Pressure Monitoring (Warning) System
TRAC Traction Control
TWI Treadwear Indicator
VIN Vehicle Identification Number
VSC Vehicle Stability Control
ABBREVIATIONS MEANING
618
Alphabetical index
Alphabetical index
A/C
Automatic air conditioning
system ................................326
ABS ...........................................296
Active head restraint ...............100
Air conditioning system
Automatic air conditioning
system ................................326
Remote Air Conditioning
System................................342
Steering wheel climate
remote control switches......337
Airbags
Airbag operating
conditions............................144
Airbag precautions for your
child ....................................148
Airbag warning light...............495
Curtain shield airbag operating
conditions............................144
Curtain shield airbag
precautions .........................148
Front passenger occupant
classification system...........154
General airbag precautions...148
Knee airbag...........................140
Locations of airbags..............140
Modification and disposal of
airbags................................153
Proper driving posture...........138
Side airbag operating
conditions............................144
Side airbag precautions ........148
Side and curtain shield airbags
operating conditions............144
Side and curtain shield airbags
precautions .........................148
SRS airbags..........................140
SRS airbag instructions for
Canadian owners................603
Antenna ....................................398
Anti-lock brake system ...........296
Armrest ..................................... 371
Audio input*.............................352
Audio remote control
switches*
Audio system*
Audio/video system*
Automatic air conditioning
system
Air conditioning system.........326
Automatic air conditioning
system ................................326
Remote Air Conditioning
System................................342
Steering wheel climate
remote control switches......337
Automatic headlight leveling
system .................................... 255
Automatic light control
system .................................... 250
AUX port*................................. 352
Auxiliary box ....................363, 376
A
619
Alphabetical index
Back door
Back door ............................... 93
Smart key system................... 61
Wireless remote control.......... 85
Back-up lights
Replacing light bulbs ............ 467
Wattage................................ 570
Battery
Checking .............................. 431
If the 12-volt battery is
discharged ......................... 543
Preparing and checking
before winter ...................... 317
Bluetooth®*
Bottle holders .......................... 362
Brake
Fluid...................................... 568
Parking brake ....................... 212
Brake assist ............................. 296
Break-in tips ............................ 181
Brightness control
Instrument panel light
control ................................ 217
Camera*
Care
Exterior..................................396
Interior...................................399
Seat belts ..............................400
Cargo capacity .........................316
Cargo hooks .............................374
CD player*
Chains .......................................319
Child restraint system
Booster seats, definition........160
Booster seats, installation .....168
Convertible seats,
definition .............................160
Convertible seats,
installation...........................168
Front passenger occupant
classification system...........154
Infant seats, definition ...........160
Infant seats, installation.........168
Installing child restraint system
with LATCH anchors...........166
Installing child restraint system
with seat belts.....................168
Installing child restraint system
with top tether strap ............172
B
C
*: Refer to “Display Audio System Owner’s Manual”
or “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
620
Alphabetical index
Child safety
Airbag precautions................148
Back door precautions ............95
Child restraint system............160
Child-protectors.......................88
How your child should wear
the seat belt ........................111
Installing child restraints........165
Power window lock switch.....123
Power window precautions ...125
Removed electronic key battery
precautions .........................455
Seat belt extender
precautions .........................116
Seat belt precautions ............112
Seat heater precautions........370
12-volt battery precautions....434
Child-protectors .........................88
Cleaning
Exterior..................................396
Interior...................................399
Seat belts ..............................400
Clock .........................................230
Condenser ................................426
Console box .............................359
Cooling system
Engine overheating ...............549
Hybrid system overheating....549
Cruise control
Cruise control........................266
Dynamic radar cruise
control.................................270
Cup holders ..............................360
Curtain shield airbags .............140
Customizable features.............590
Daytime running light
system .................................... 253
Deck board ...............................374
Defogger
Rear window .........................346
Side mirrors...........................346
Dimensions ..............................560
Dinghy towing ..........................323
Display
Dynamic radar cruise
control.................................270
Multi-information ...................223
Warning messages ...............507
Do-it-yourself maintenance ....410
Door lock
Back door................................93
Side doors...............................87
Smart key system ...................61
Wireless remote control ..........85
Doors
Back door................................93
Door glasses.........................123
Door lock.....................61, 85, 87
Rear door child-protector ........88
Side doors...............................87
Driver’s seat belt reminder
light......................................... 498
Driving
Break-in tips..........................181
Correct posture .....................138
Procedures............................180
Winter driving tips .................317
D
621
Alphabetical index
Eco drive mode switch ........... 204
Electric power steering........... 296
Electronic key
If the electronic key does not
operate properly................. 541
Replacing battery ................. 454
Emergency, in case of
If a warning buzzer
sounds ............................... 493
If a warning light turns on ..... 493
If the electronic key does not
operate properly................. 541
If the hybrid system will not
start.................................... 538
If the 12-volt battery is
discharged ......................... 543
If you have a flat tire ............ 523
If you lose your keys............. 540
If you think something is
wrong ................................. 492
If your vehicle becomes
stuck................................... 554
If your vehicle has to be
stopped in an
emergency ......................... 556
If your vehicle needs to be
towed ................................. 485
If your vehicle overheats ...... 549
Emergency flashers
Switch................................... 484
Engine
Accessory mode....................194
Compartment ........................419
Hood......................................413
How to start the hybrid
system ................................192
Identification number.............561
If the hybrid system will not
start.....................................538
Ignition switch........................192
Overheating...........................549
“POWER” switch ...................192
Engine coolant
Capacity ................................566
Checking ...............................424
Preparing and checking
before winter .......................317
Engine/power control
unit coolant
Capacity ................................566
Checking ...............................424
Preparing and checking
before winter .......................317
Engine oil
Capacity ................................563
Checking ...............................420
Preparing and checking
before winter .......................317
Enhanced VSC .........................296
EPS............................................296
EV drive mode switch..............199
Event data recorder ...................25
E
622
Alphabetical index
Floor mats.................................372
Fluid
Brake.....................................568
Washer..................................429
Fog lights
Replacing light bulbs.............467
Switch....................................256
Wattage.................................570
Foot lights.................................353
Front fog lights
Replacing light bulbs.............467
Switch....................................256
Wattage.................................570
Front passenger occupant
classification system ............154
Front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light.........................498
Front seats
Adjustment ..............................99
Front side marker light
Replacing light bulbs.............467
Wattage.................................570
Front turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs.............467
Switch....................................211
Wattage.................................570
Fuel
Capacity ................................562
Fuel gauge ............................214
Information ............................571
Refueling...............................131
Type ......................................571
Fuel door...................................131
Fuel filler door ..........................131
Fuses.........................................456
Garage door opener ................380
Gauges...................................... 214
Glove boxes .............................358
Hands-free system
(for cellular phone)*
Hazard lights
Switch ...................................484
Head restraints
Adjustment ...........................105
Headlight cleaner..................... 265
Headlights
Cleaner .................................265
Replacing light bulbs.............467
Switch ...................................250
Wattage.................................570
Heaters
Automatic air conditioning
system ................................326
Seat heaters..........................369
Side mirrors...........................346
Hill-start assist control............301
Hood..........................................413
Hooks
Cargo ....................................374
Horn .......................................... 213
Hybrid system
Eco savings record .................53
Emergency shut off system.....37
Energy monitor/
consumption screen .............42
High voltage components .......36
Hybrid System Indicator........225
Ignition switch .......................192
Monthly fuel
consumption record..............53
“POWER” switch...................192
F
G
H
623
Alphabetical index
I/M test...................................... 409
Identification
Engine .................................. 562
Vehicle.................................. 561
Ignition switch ......................... 192
Illuminated entry system........ 353
Immobilizer system................. 135
Indicator lights ........................ 219
Initialization
Items to initialize................... 597
Inside rear view mirror............ 118
Instrument panel light
control.................................... 217
Interior lights
Interior lights................. 354, 355
Switch........................... 354, 355
Wattage................................ 570
Jack
Positioning a floor jack ......... 416
Vehicle-equipped jack .......... 523
Jack handle.............................. 523
Keyless entry............................. 85
Keys
Electronic key......................... 58
If the electronic key does not
operate properly................. 541
If you lose your keys............. 540
Key number............................ 58
Keyless entry.......................... 85
Keys ....................................... 58
Mechanical key....................... 58
“POWER” switch .................. 192
Wireless remote
control key............................ 85
Knee airbag.............................. 140
Lane-Keeping Assist ...............286
Language ..................................238
License plate lights
Replacing light bulbs.............467
Wattage.................................570
Light bulbs
Replacing ..............................467
Wattage.................................570
Lights
Emergency flasher switch .....484
Fog light switch .....................256
Foot lights..............................353
Hazard light switch................484
Headlight switch....................250
Interior lights..................354, 355
Personal lights.......................355
Replacing light bulbs.............467
Shift lever lighting..................353
Turn signal lever....................211
Turn signal light switch..........211
Vanity lights...........................365
Wattage.................................570
LKA............................................286
Load capacity ...........................316
Luggage compartment light
Switch......................................94
Wattage.................................570
Luggage cover .........................377
I
J
K
L
*: Refer to “Display Audio System Owner’s Manual”
or “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
624
Alphabetical index
Maintenance
Do-it-yourself
maintenance .......................410
General maintenance............405
Maintenance data..................560
Maintenance requirements....402
Maintenance data.....................403
Meter
Instrument panel light
control.................................217
Meters ...................................214
Speed unit select button........216
Trip information display.........229
Micro dust and pollen filter.....330
Microphone*............................388
Mirrors
Inside rear view mirror...........118
Side mirror heater .................346
Side mirrors...........................121
Vanity mirrors........................365
MP3 disc*
Multi-information display ........223
Navigation system
(refer to “Navigation
System Owner’s Manual”)
Noise from under vehicle ..........22
Odometer ..................................214
Oil
Engine oil ..............................420
Opener
Back door................................93
Fuel filler door .......................131
Hood......................................413
Outside rear view mirrors
Adjusting and folding.............121
Outside rear view mirror
defogger switch .....................346
Outside temperature
display .................................... 366
Overheating.............................. 549
Parking brake ...........................212
Parking lights
Switch ...................................250
PCS ........................................... 303
Personal lights
Switch ...................................355
Wattage.................................570
Power outlets ...........................367
“POWER” switch ..................... 192
Power windows........................ 123
Pre-collision system................303
Radar cruise control
system .................................... 270
Radiator .................................... 426
Radio*
Radio data system*
RDS*
Rear seats
Adjustment............................102
Folding down.........................103
Rear turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs.............467
Wattage.................................570
Rear view mirror ..............118, 121
Rear view monitor system*
Rear window and outside
rear view mirror
defoggers ............................... 346
Rear window wiper and
washer .................................... 262
Remote Air Conditioning
System.................................... 342
M
N
O
P
R
625
Alphabetical index
Replacing
Electronic key battery........... 454
Fuses.................................... 456
Light bulbs............................ 467
Tires ..................................... 523
Reporting safety defects for
U.S. owners ........................... 600
Safety Connect ........................ 388
Seat belt reminder light .......... 498
Seat belts
Adjusting the seat belt.......... 110
Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR).................................. 111
Child restraint system
installation.......................... 165
Cleaning and maintaining
the seat belt ....................... 400
Emergency Locking Retractor
(ELR) ................................. 111
How to wear your
seat belt ............................. 109
How your child should wear
the seat belt ....................... 111
Pre-collision seat belts ......... 303
Pregnant women,
proper seat belt use ........... 113
Reminder light ...................... 498
Seat belt extenders .............. 112
Seat belt instructions
for Canadian owners.......... 601
Seat belt pretensioners ........ 110
Seat heaters............................. 369
Seating capacity...................... 316
Seats
Adjustment .....................99, 102
Adjustment
precautions .................101, 104
Child seats/child restraint
system installation ..............165
Cleaning................................399
Folding down the
seatbacks............................103
Head restraint........................105
Properly sitting in the seat.....138
Seat heaters..........................369
Service reminder
indicators ..............................219
Shift lever
Transmission.........................202
Side airbags..............................140
Side marker lights
Replacing light bulbs.............467
Switch....................................250
Wattage.................................570
Side mirrors
Adjusting and folding.............121
Smart key system
Antenna location .....................64
Entry functions ........................61
Starting the hybrid system.....192
Solar Ventilation System.........339
SOS button ...............................388
Spare tire
Inflation pressure...................569
Storage location ....................523
Spark plug ................................566
Specifications...........................560
Speedometer ............................214
S
*: Refer to “Display Audio System Owner’s Manual”
or “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
626
Alphabetical index
Steering wheel
Adjustment ............................117
Audio switches*
Storage feature.........................357
Stuck
If your vehicle becomes
stuck ...................................554
Sun visors.................................364
Switch
Audio remote control switches*
Cruise control switch.............266
Driving mode select
switch..................................204
Eco drive mode switch ..........204
Emergency flasher switch .....484
EV drive mode switch............199
Fog light switch .....................256
Hazard light switch................484
Headlight cleaner switch.......265
Ignition switch........................192
Light switches........................250
Power door lock switch ...........87
“POWER” switch ...................192
Power window switch............123
Pre-collision braking off
switch..................................304
Talk switch*
Telephone switch*
Ventilation switch ..................339
Window lock switch...............123
Wipers and washer switch ....258
Tail lights
Switch ...................................250
Talk switch*
Telephone switch*
Theft deterrent system
Immobilizer system ...............135
Theft prevention labels ...........137
Tire inflation pressure .............447
Tire information
Glossary................................582
Size.......................................578
Tire identification number......577
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading...............................580
Tires
Chains...................................319
Checking...............................437
If you have a flat tire..............523
Inflation pressure ..................447
Inflation pressure sensor.......438
Information............................575
Replacing..............................523
Rotating tires.........................437
Size.......................................569
Snow tires .............................317
Spare tire ..............................523
Tire pressure warning
system ........................437, 499
T
627
Alphabetical index
Tonneau cover......................... 377
Tools......................................... 523
Touch tracer display ............... 215
Total load capacity.................. 316
Towing
Dinghy towing....................... 323
Emergency towing................ 486
Trailer towing........................ 322
TRAC ........................................ 296
Traction control....................... 296
Trailer towing........................... 322
Transmission
Hybrid transmission.............. 202
P position switch................... 205
Trip information....................... 229
Trip meter................................. 214
Turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs ............ 467
Switch................................... 211
Wattage................................ 570
USB port*................................ 352
Vanity lights
Vanity lights.......................... 365
Wattage................................ 570
Vanity mirrors.......................... 365
Vehicle control and operation
data recording......................... 24
Vehicle identification
number................................... 561
Vehicle proximity notification
system ..................................... 32
Vehicle stability control.......... 296
VSC........................................... 296
Warning buzzers
Brake system ........................493
Open door ............................498
Seat belt reminder.................498
Warning lights
Anti-lock brake system
(ABS) ..................................495
Automatic headlight leveling
system ................................497
Brake system ................493, 496
Charging system ...................494
Cruise control........................497
Electric power steering
system ................................495
High coolant temperature......494
Hybrid system .......................495
Low fuel level ........................498
Low tire pressure...................499
Malfunction indicator lamp ....495
Open door .............................498
Pre-collision system ..............496
Radar cruise control..............497
Seat belt warning light...........498
Slip indicator..........................496
SRS airbags..........................495
Tire pressure warning light....499
U
V
W
*: Refer to “Display Audio System Owner’s Manual”
or “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
628
Alphabetical index
Warning messages ..................507
Washer
Checking ...............................429
Preparing and checking
before winter.......................317
Switch....................................258
Washing and waxing ...............396
Weight
Cargo capacity ......................316
Load limits.............................316
Weight...................................560
Wheels ......................................451
Window glasses.......................123
Window lock switch.................123
Windows
Power windows .....................123
Rear window defogger..........346
Washer..................................258
Windshield wipers ...................258
Winter driving tips ...................317
Wireless remote control key
Locking/Unlocking...................85
Replacing the battery............454
WMA disc*
629
Alphabetical index
*: Refer to “Display Audio System Owner’s Manual”
or “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
630
What to do if...
What to do if...
A tire punctures
P. 523 If you have a flat tire
The hybrid system does not start
P. 538 If the hybrid system will not start
P. 135 Immobilizer system
P. 543 If the 12-volt battery is
discharged
The high coolant temperature
warning light flashes or comes on
“HYBRID SYSTEM OVERHEAT”
is displayed
Steam can be seen coming
from under the hood
P. 549 If your vehicle overheats
The key is lost
P. 540 If you lose your keys
The 12-volt battery runs out
P. 543 If the 12-volt battery is
discharged
The doors cannot be locked
P. 87 Side doors
P. 93 Back door
The vehicle is stuck in mud or
sand
P. 554 If the vehicle becomes stuck
A warning light or indicator
light comes on
P. 493 If a warning light turns on or a
warning buzzer sounds
631
What to do if...
■Warning lights
P. 499
or
P. 495
or
P. 493 P. 495
P. 494 P. 496
P. 494 P. 496
P. 496
or
P. 495 P. 497
P. 495 P. 497
Master warning light
ABS warning light
Brake system warning
light (red indicator)
Electric power steering
system warning light
Charging system
warning light
Pre-collision system
warning light
*
High coolant
temperature warning
light
Slip indicator light
Brake system warning
light (yellow indicator)
Malfunction indicator
lamp
Automatic headlight
leveling system
warning light
SRS warning light
Cruise control indicator
light*
632
What to do if...
P. 497 P. 498
P. 496 P. 499
P. 498
P. 498
P. 498
*: The light flashes to indicate a malfunction.
Radar cruise control
indicator light*
Driver’s belt reminder
light
“LKA” indicator
light*
Tire pressure warning
light
Open door warning light
Low fuel level warning
light
Front passenger’s seat
belt reminder light
633
What to do if...
634
What to do if...
635
What to do if...
636
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Fuel filler door
P. 131
Auxiliary catch lever
P. 4 13
Fuel filler door opener
P. 131
Tire inflation pressure
P. 569
Hood lock release lever
P. 413
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference) 11.9 gal. (45 L, 9.9 Imp.gal.)
Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only P. 562
Cold tire inflation
pressure P. 569
Engine oil capacity
(Drain and refill
reference)
qt. (L, Imp.qt.)
With filter 4.4 (4.2, 3.7)
Without filter 4.1 (3.9, 3.4)
Engine oil type Toyota Genuine Motor Oil or equivalent
Oil grade: ILSAC multigrade engine oil P. 563
